Skip to main content

Full text of "Hindustani simplified, an easy and rapid self-instructor .."

See other formats


HUGO'S    SIMPLIFIED    SYSTEM. 


HINDUSTANI 

SIMPLIFIED. 

AN    EASY    AND    RAPID    SELF-INSTRUCTOR. 


Containing — 

A    CONDENSED    AND    SIMPLIFIED    GRAMMAR, 
PRACTICAL    CONVERSATION, 

READING   EXERCISES, 
COMMERCIAL,  IDIOMATIC  &  MISCELLANEOUS  PHRASES, 

LISTS  of  USEFUL  and  INDISPENSABLE    WORDS 
and  EXPRESSIONS. 


A  PRACTICAL   GUIDE   TO  MODERN  CONVERSATIONAL 

HINDUSTANI    WITH 
IMITATED    PRONUNCIATION    OF   EVERY  WORD. 


All  rights  reserved. 

PHILADELPHIA 

DAVID   MCKAY   COMPANY 

Washington  Square 


PRINTED  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES  OF  AMERICA 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE  EASY. 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS. 


The  introduction  of  this  work  not  only  makes  it  pos- 
sible, but  even  easy,  to  acquire  a  conversational  knowledge  of 
Hindustani.  The  whole  of  the  instruction  throughout  has 
been  compiled  on  HUGO'S  well  known  Simplified  System, 
the  success  of  which  is  due  to  its  commonsense  character. 
It  avoids  all  confusing  technicalities  of  grammar,  and  im- 
parts a  knowledge  of  the  language  in  an  absolutely  practical 
manner  which,  after  all,  is  what  the  learner  really  wants. 

Easy  Conversational  Phrases  introducing  the  most 
important  Idiomatic  Expressions  are  included,  while  the 
Reading  Exercises  will  be  found  greatly  to  extend  the 
vocabulary  at  the  student's  command. 

A  few  words  in  explanation  of  the  LANGUAGE  and  its 
ALPHABET  may  be  of  service. 

Hindustani  is  the  language  most  generally  spoken 
throughout  British  India.  It  is  a  combination  of  Hindi 
and  Urdu.  HlNDT  is  the  literary  language  of  the  Hindus, 
written  in  Sanskrit  characters  ;  URDU  is  the  literary  lan- 
guage of  the  Mohammedans,  written  in  Persian  characters, 
ttenerally  speaking  the  same  grammatical  rules  apply  to 
each,  and  consequently  we  deal  with  the  language  from 
the  common  point  of  view,  freely  introducing  such  words 
from  the  Hindi  or  the  Urdu  as  are  current  in  everyday 
speech.  Anyone  who  has  learnt  the  language  from  this 
book  w:ll  understand  and  be  understood  by  any  native 
whether  Hin<ln  or  Mohammedan. 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI    MADE    EASY. 


We  have  followed  the  usual  practice  of  transcribing  the 
Oriental  characters  into  ordinary  Roman  characters.  These 
are  understood  by  natives  and  are  used  by  them  when 
communicating  with  people  of  European  nationality  ;  but 
when  one  Indian  writes  to  another  he  would  naturally  use 
the  original  Oriental  characters. 

The  Nagari  or  Sanskrit  characters  shown  on  page  6  are 
given  for  reference  only.  The  transcribed  form  underneath 
these  letters  is  the  one  that  concerns  the  student.  Although 
the  alphabet  is  Sanskrit,  it  includes  a  few  letters  which 
liave  been  adopted  from  the  Persian  and  are  in  common  use. 
These  letters  are  :  q,  kh.  gh.  Z  and  f.  As  they  cannot  be 
indicated  by  separate  Sanskrit  characters,  they  are  always 
represented  by  their  nearest  Sanskrit  equivalent,  with  the 
addition  of  a  dot  ( . ).  Thus,  q =k  with  dot ;  kh =kh  with 
(lot,  and  so  on.  This  is  clearly  illustrated  on  page  6. 

We  have  omitted  a  few  letters  of  the  Sanskrit  alphabet 
not  used  in  everyday  speech,  as  their  inclusion  would  only 
tend  to  confuse  the  student.  For  the  same  reason  we  have 
also  omitted  the  Sanskrit  characters  indicating  slight  diffe- 
rences in  the  pronunciation  of  the  letters,  t,  til,  and  d,  dh. 
The  delicate  shade  of  sound  expressed  by  these  characters 
cannot  be  detected  by  the  untrained  ear,  and  it  is  therefore 
impossible  to  transcribe  them.  They  can  only  be  learnt  by 
constantly  hearing  them  in  Hindustani  speech.  For  all 
practical  purposes  however,  the  alphabet  and  its  transcrip- 
tion, as  given  on  page  6,  is  entirely  sufficient. 

Special  attention  has  been  devoted  to  the  IMITATED 
PRONUNCIATION.  If  the  learner  attends  carefully  to  our 
instructions,  he  will  pronounce  nearly  all  the  words  per- 
fectly, and  all  with  sufficient  correctness  for  practical  pur- 
poses. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

The  Hindustani  or  Nagari  Alphabet  -  6 

Key  to  the  Transcription  and  the  Imitated  Pronunciation          7 
Rules  for  Pronunciation  -      8-13 

SIMPLIFIED  GRAMMAR,  with  Exercises  and  Key,  Conver- 
sational Phrases,  and  Easy  Reading  Exercises      14,  15,  etc. 


Cardinal  Numbers 

91 

Ordinal  Numbers 

93 

Collective  and  Fractional  Numbers 

94 

Days  of  the  Week         ... 

17 

Months  of  the  Year      ... 

44 

Periods  of  Time            ... 

95 

Hours  of  the  Day         - 

96 

Short  Vocabularies  of  Useful  Nouns 

136-143 

The  Town           -   page  136 
The  Hotel          -            136 

Trades                -   page  140 
Utensils  and  Tools         140 

The  Railway      -            137 
Shipping             -             137 
The  House         -            137 
Furniture           •            138 
The  Body                        138 
Eating  and  Drinking     139 

Writing  Materials 
Colours 
The  Army 
Titles,  Professions, 
etc. 
Banking,  etc.     • 

141 
141 

142 
143 

Money  Values 

List  of  Indispensable  Words 
Idiomatic  Phrases 
Commercial  Phrases      - 
Miscellaneous  Phrases   - 
Points  of  the  Compass 


148 
144 
148 
149 
157 
160 


HUGO  8  HINDUSTANI  MAi)K   EASY. 


INDEX    TO    GRAMMAR. 


ARTICLES  :— 

Definite  Article 
Indefinite  Article 


PAGE 

14 
14 


NOUNS  :— 

Gender  of  Nouns             ...  14 

Plural  of  Nouns               ...  18 

Nouns  folio  wed  by  ka,  ke,  ki  19 

PRONOUNS  :— 
Possessive  Pronouns        ...         16 
Pronouns  for  the  Nomina- 
tive (Subject)  ...        21 
Pronouns  for  the  Accusa- 
tive (Object)  ...        50 
Interrogative  Pronouns  21,98,99 
Reflective  Pronouns         ...  97,  98 
Relative  Pronouns  ...       115 
Indefinite  Pronouns         ...         85 
Demonstrative  Pronouns       14, 43 

VERBS  :— 

Auxiliary  Verbs   21,  23, 39,  73,  74 

TO  HAVE,  how  rendered  ...        24 

Conjugation  of  verbs     38,  39,  41, 

42,  44,  50,  58 

Construction  with  ne      ...  42,  43 
Irreg.  Past  Participles     44, 50,  58 
Imperative         ...  ...  52,53 

Future  Tense     ...  ...         66 

Conditional  Future          ...         68 
Conditional  Past  ...         68 

Compound  Verbs  106,  107 

Passive  Verbs   ...  ...       109 

Causal  Verbs     ...  124,  125 

ADJECTIVES  :— 
Declension  of  Adjectives  31 

Comparison  of          ,         82,83,84 


PAGE 

ADVERBS  :— 

Adverbs  and  Adverbial  Ex- 
pressions       ...             ...  60, 61 

Adverbs  of  Time              ...  66,  67 

PREPOSITIONS          ...  45 

CONJUNCTIONS          ...  67 

INTERJECTIONS        ...  125 

Forms  of  address          ...  126 

Salutation         ...           ...  126 

Thanks,  how  expressed  127 

Narration          ...           ...  100 

MISCELLANEOUS  :— 

Use  of  the  verb  raihna  ...  41 

jana  (idiomatic  use  of)  ...  109 

lagna  (idiomatic  use  of)  118 

chahna  (idiomatic  use  of)  127 
hota  hai  (or  haia)  when 

used                ...             ...  8-1 

yeh  and  wuh  before  Pre- 
positions       ...            ...  43, 45 

AS  ...  AS,  how  rendered  ...  83 
mat,  NOT,  when  used     ...  53 
apna,  etc.  (use  of)          ...  97, 98 
SELF  and  SELVES,  how  ren- 
dered            ...            ...  97,  98 

Second     Person     (familiar 

form)             ...            ...  118 

sa,  se,  si  (rules  for  use  of)  100 

ka,  ke,  ki  (use  of)        ...  19 

ki,  in  narration                ...  100 

ko  (use  of)        ...            ...  42, 50 

jo,  jis,  etc.,  how  used     ...  115 

wala  (idiomatic  use  of) ...  128 

hi,  how  used     ...             ...  127 

kya  (idiomatic  use  of)    ...  21 
aur,  omitted  or  rendered 

by  O           ...            ...  127 


HUGOS   HINDUSTANI  MADJi  JiASY. 


THE   HINDUSTANI   OR   NAGART  ALPHABET. 
Names  of  the  Letters  and  their  English  Equivalents. 


VOWELS. 

T     * 


a  a  i  I  u  ft 

o«  in :  dismal      army  in  keen  put  fool 


e  ai  o  au,  ott 

as  in :  say        said,  aisle          low  awl,  now 

CONSONANTS. 


k  q  kh  kh'  g  gb 

at  in :  king       quick  k'h1  loch  go  h'r* 


gh  oh  chk  j  z  Jh 

CM  in  :  g'hf    church  ch'b*  joy  zeal  j'h* 


t  th  d  dh  n  p 

<u  in :  take      t'h*  day  d'h*  no  pay 


ph  f  b  bh  m  7 

at  in :  pV         fine  bit  bV  man  year 


r  1  v,  w  s  ah  h 

in :  road    land          vale,  work  sale  shame  hay 

*  See  note  on  page  7. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST. 


NOTE. — The  pronnndation  of  the  letters,  k'h,  g'h,  ch*h,  J'h,  t'tt, 
d'h,  p'h,  b*h,  is  best  Illustrated  by  such  words  as  :  1  sack'him  ; 
2  gag'him  ;  3  watch'him  ;  4  gauge'him  ;  5  shoot'bJm  ;  6  had'he  ; 
7  stop'him  ;  8  cab'horse.  In  Hindustani  the  h  after  a  consonant  must 
always  be  distinctly  heard. 

kh  and  gh  are  gutturals ;  kh  is  pronounced  like  oh  in  the  word 
LOCH  ;  gfl  has  no  equivalent  in  English — the  sound  of  aspirated  h  fol- 
lowed by  r  is  the  nearest. 


KEY    TO   THE    TRANSCRIPTION    AND    THE 
IMITATED    PRONUNCIATION. 


a,  1,  U    indicate  the  long  sound  of  these  vowels. 

In  the  Imitated  Pronunciation  these  are  given  as  :  ah, 
ee,  oo. 

kh     (underlined)  indicates  the  guttural  sound  of  CH   in  the 
Scotch  word  LOCH,  preceded  by  a  strongly  aspirated  H. 
In  the  Imitated  Pronunciation  this  sound  is  represented 
by  h'ch. 

gfa     (underlined)  indicates  the  sound  of  a  strongly  aspirated  H 
(as  in  HUGE),  followed  by  a  rattling  sound  ;•     -f  R. 
In  the  Imitated  Pronunciation  this  sound  is  represented 
by  h'r. 

ft    indicates  the  nasal  sound  of  N  as  in  LONG,  KING,  etc.,  but  not 
so  strong.     It  is,  perhaps,  more  like  the  sound  of  N  in 
the  French  words  BIEN,  TIEN,  etc. 
In  the  Imitated   Pronunciation   this  nasal   sound   is 
represented  by  ng  (italic). 

( ' )  In  the  Transcription  an  apostrophe  between  two  vowels 
{as  a'l)  indicates  that  these  must  be  pronounced  as  two 
distinct  syllables. 

( ' )  In  the  Imitated  Pronunciation  an  apostrophe  between  two 
CONSONANTS  indicates  that  both  letters  must  be  di»- 
tinctly  pronounced  but  in  one  breath  as  ONE  syllable. 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


RULES    FOR    PRONUNCIATION. 


THE  VOWELS. 

a  (short)  is  like  English  A  in  DISMAL  (or  sometimes  like  U 
in  GUN),  as  in  : 
akal  aman  lafz  par 

ak-al  or  ak-ul     am-an  or  am-un  lafz  par 

wisdom  peace  word  at 

a  (long)  is  like  the  English  A  in  ARMY,  as  in  : 

aram  bap  man  bolna 

ah-rabm  bahp  mating  bohl-nah 

comfort  father  mother  to  speak 

1  (short)  is  like  English  I  in  BEGIN,  as  in  : 
kitab  ilm  inam 

kit-ahb  ilm  in-ahm 

book  knowledge          reward 


phir 

p'hir 
again 


1  (long)  is  like  English  BE  in  KEEN,  as  in  : 

ifit  meri  bijli  larki 

eenfltt  may-ree  bidj-lee  lar-kee 

brick  my  lightning  girl 

U  (short)  is  like  English  U  in  PUT,  as  in  : 

usko  pul  mujhe  bulbul 

us-koh  pul  mudj-hay  bul-bul 

him  bridge  me  nightingale 

U  (long)  is  like  English  u  in  FULL,  as  in  : 

unt  pliul  ullu  dudh. 

oongt  p'hool  ul-loo  dood'h 

camel  flower  owl  milk 

8  is  always  long,  like  English  AY  in  SAY,  as  in  : 

mera  ek  se  yeh  tez 

may-rah  ayk  say  yay'h  tayz 

my  one  by  this  sharp 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 


O  is  always  long,  like  English  0  in  LOW,  as  in  : 

do  hona  mop         tota  chop 

doh  hoh-nah  mohr  toh-tah  chohr 

two  to  be  peacock         parrot  thief 


THE    DIPHTHONGS. 


There  are  two  diphthongs  in  Hindustani,  ai  and 
each  of  which  has  two  distinct  sounds. 

1. — ai  usually  sounds  like  English  AI  in  SAID,  as  in : 
maina  raihna  maifi. 

mai-nah  rai'h-nah  main; 

a  bird  to  dwell  I 

2. — ai  sometimes  sounds  like  English  AI  in  AISLE,  as  in  : 
g-aiya  bhaiya  maiya 

gaiy-ah  b'haiy-ah  maiy-ah 

cow  brother  mother 

(terms  of  endearment) 

NOTE. — When  either  a  or  i  or  both  are  long  vowela 
they  do  not  form  a  diphthong.  The  two  vowels  must  then 
be  pronounced  separately  as  two  syllables,  and  are  fre- 
quently separated  by  an  apostrophe,  as  in  : 

sha'ir  ara'ish  bha'i 

shah-er  ah-rah-esh  b'hah-ee 

poet  adornment  brother 

1. — au  usually  sounds  like  English  AW  in  LAW,  as  in; 
aurat          aur          fauran          maut 

aw-rat  awr  faw-ran  mawt 

woman  and  at  once  death 

2. — au  sometimes  sounds  like  English  ow  in  HOW,  as  in  : 
kaua  haua  paua 

kow-ah  how-ah  pow-ah 

crow  goblin  fourth  part 

H.S.— 1* 


10  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


THE    CONSONANTS. 


With  a  few  exceptions,  the  consonants  are  pronounced 
the  same  as  in  English. 

k  is  like  English  K  in  KING,  as  in  : 

kutta          kismat          talak          kya  ? 

kut-tah  kis-mat  tal-ak  kyah 

dog  fate  until  what  ? 

Q  has  a  slightly  softer  sound  than  k,  but  the  untrained  ear 
cannot  detect  the  difference.  The  quite  correct  pro- 
nunciation of  q  can  only  be  acquired  by  hearing  it 
used  in  Indian  speech,  as  in  : 

qalam  quran  qimat 

ka-lam  kur-ahn  kee-mat 

pen  koran  price 

The  above  words  are  often  seen  written  with  k  instead  of  q. 

kh. — the  h  after  k  should  be  distinctly  heard,  as  in  : 
khet          khana          kliona          pankha 

k'hayt  k'hah-nah  k'hoh-nah  panj-k'hah 

field  to  eat  to  lose  fan 

kh.  (underlined)  has  the  guttural  sound  of  CH  in  the  Scotch 
word  LOCH,  preceded  by  strongly  aspirated  H.     In  the 
imitated  pronunciation  this  sound  is  given  as  h'ch,  as  in : 
khali       khiyal       kharidna       darakht 

h'chah-lee         h'clii-yahl          h'cbar-eed-nah          dar-ab'cht 
empty          thought  to  buy  tree 

g  is  like  English  G  in  GO,  as  in  : 

gana  gae  gehun          gari 

gah-nah  gah-ay  gay-hoo»v  gah-ree 

to  sing  cow  wheat  carriage 

gh  is  like  English  G  in  GO  with  a  distinctly  aspirated  H 
after  it,  as  in  : 

ghora  ghas  ghar 

g'hoh-rah  g'hahs  g'har 

horse  grass  house 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE    EASY.  11 

gh,  (underlined)  is  like  a  strongly  aspirated  H,  followed  by 
a  rattling  sound  as  of  R.  In  the  imitated  pronuncia- 
tion this  sound  is  given  as  h'r,  as  in  : 

murgiii  gkussa  ghul 

mur-h'ree  h'rus-sah  h'rul 

hen  anger  noise 

11  this  sound  is  too  difficult  to  pronounce  make  it  like  a  as  in  GO. 

ch.  is  like  CH  in  the  English  word  CHURCH,  as  in  : 

chor  chacha  chiz  cliaku 

chohr        cha-chah         cheez        chah-koo 

thief  uncle  thing  knife 

Chh. — the  ll  after  Ch  should  be  distinctly  heard,  as  in  : 
chhutti          chhe        achchlia         pichiie 

ch'hnt-tee  ch'hay  ach-ch'hah  pee-oh'hay 

holiday  six  good  behind 

j  is  like  English  J  in  JUST,  as  in  : 

jal  jald  jo  janana 

jahl  jald  job  jah-na-nah 

net  haste  who  to  know 

jll — the  ll  after  j  should  be  distinctly  heard,  as  in  : 
samajhna  4llukl1^ 

sa-maj'h-nah  j'huk-naa 

to  understand  to  bend 

Z  is  like  English  Z  very  soft,  as  in  : 

zalim  ziyada  zor 

zah-lim  ze-yah-dah  zohr 

tyrant  more  force 

t  is  like  English  t,  but  rather  softer,  as  in  : 

turn  tin  tattu  tokri 

turn  teen  tat-too  toh-kree 

you  three  pony  basket 

th — the  ll  after  t  should  be  distinctly  heard  as  a  separate 
letter,  as  in  : 

thakan  thai  thik          satli 

t'ha-kahn  t'hahl  t'heek  saht'h 

fatigue  plate  correct  sixty 

TH  must  never  be  pronounced  as  Engh'sh  TH  in  THE,  THIS,  THAT,  etc. 


HI  GO  8  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 


d  is  like  English  d  or  sometimes  softer,  almost  like  TH  in 
THOU,  as  in  : 

dal          das          din          dak          dar 

dahl  das  din  dabk  dar 

lentils  ten  day  post  fear 

dh. — the  ll  after  d  should  be  distinctly  heard,  as  in  : 

dhup  dhat  dhakna  dharra 

d'hiiop  d  haht  d'hak-nah  d'har-rah 

sunshine  metal  to  cover  routine 

n  is  like  English  n,  as  in  : 

nak  kan  kisan 

nahk  kahn  ke-sabn 

nose  ear  peasant 

n  (nasal)  is  like  English  N  in  KING,  LONG,  or,  better,  like 
French  N  in  BIEN,  TIEN,  as  in  : 

nahin          tang-          sanp          ban 

na-heeiif  t&hng  sahnyp  hahnf 

not  leg  snake  yes 

p  is  like  English  p,  as  in  : 

piyas         pas          pul  pak         par 

pe-yahs  pahs  pull  pahk  par 

thirst  near  bridge  holy  at 

ph. — the  ll  after  p  should  be  distinctly  heard,  as  in  : 
phul  phal  phir  phika 

p'hool  p'hal  p'hir  p'hee-kah 

flower  fruit  again  tasteless 

ph  can  never  have  the  sound  of  f  as  in  English. 

f  is  like  English  f,  as  in  : 

fursat  fauran  saf  lihaf 

fur-sat  faw-ran  sahf  le-hahf 

leisure  at  once  clean  quilt 

b  is  like  English  b,  as  in  : 

bal  beta  bis  bolna 

bahl  bay-tab  bees  bohl-nah 

hair  SOP  twenty  to  speak 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 


13 


bh. — the  h.  after  b  should  be  distinctly  heard,  as  in 


buffalo 
mail 

matin? 

mother 


bhuk  bhulna         bhaifis 

b'hook  b'bool-nah 

hunger  to  forget 

m  is  like  English  m,  as  in  : 
menh  mahina 

mayn'n  ma-hee-nah 

rain  mouth 

y  is  like  English  Y  in  YEAR,  YES,  etc.,  as  in  : 
yad  yahafi.  yufi 

yahd  ya-hahn*  yooa? 

remembrance         here  thus 

r  is  like  English  R  in  ROAD,  as  in  : 

rasta  par  sarak 

rahs-tah  pabr  sa-rack 

way  across  road 

1  is  like  English  1,  as  in  : 

salam  sal  lash 

sa-lahm  sahl  lahs'n 

greeting  year  corpse 

V  and  W  are  pronounced  like  English  V,  as  in 


bhaflp 

b'habnjp 

steam 

muft 

muft 

gratia 

yeli 

yay'h 
this 

har 

hahr 
garland 

tolna 

tohl-nah 
to  weigh 

jawab 

ja-vahb 

answer 
savar 

sa-vahr 
horseman 


wuh  vahafi  vakt 

vo'b  va-hahnj  vakt 

he  there  time 

8  is  like  English  hard  S,  as  in  : 

grhas  sat  sir 

g'hahs  saht  nr  or  ser 

grass  seven  bead 

Sh  is  like  English  SH  in  SHAME,  as  in  : 

shabash      shadi      shabnam 

shah-bahsh  shah-dee  shab-nam 

bravo  rejoicings  dew 

h  is  like  English  H  in  HAY,  as  in  : 

jahan  shaihar  hakim  hal 

ja-hahn  sbai-bar  ba-keem  hahl 

world  town  physician       condition 


14  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EAST. 


FIRST    LESSON. 


The  Imitated  Pronunciation  is  given  under  each  word,  or  in  paren- 
theses (  )  by  the  side  of  the  word. 

THE   ARTICLES. 

1. — The  English  Definite  Article  THE  and  the  Indefinite 
Article  A  or  AN,  have  no  exact  equivalents  in  the  Hindu- 
stani language. 

The  Definite  Article  THE  is  either  omitted  in  translation, 
or  the  words  THIS  yen  (yay'h)  and  THAT  Wllh*  (vo'h)  are 
used  in  the  place  of  it.  Therefore — 

mard  (mard)   means  MAN  or  THE  MAN 
yeh  mard       „       THE  MAN  or  THIS  MAN 
wuli  mard      „       THE  MAN  or  THAT  MAN 

'Here  the  u  is  to  be  pronounced  as  intermediate  between  o  and  u. 

2. — The  Indefinite  Article  A  or  AN  can  also  be  omitted 
in  translation,  but  it  is  usually  rendered  by  the  numeral 
ONE,  ek  (ayk)  ;  therefore— 

ek  mard  means  A  MAN  or  ONE  MAN 


HERE  yahan       THERE  vahan        WHERE  ?  kalian  ? 

ya-haTTnp  va-hah^  ka-haH^? 

IS    hal  (hai)  NOT    nahlfi  (na-heenff) 

NOTE. — a,  I  and  u.  indicate  the  long  sound  of  these  vowels,  given  in 
the  Imitated  Pronunciation  as  :  ah,  ee,  oo  ;  e  (ay)  and  o  (oh)  are  always 
long ;  fi  indicates  the  nasal  sound  of  the  English  n  before  g  as  in  LONQ 
but  not  quite  so  strong.  See  also  Rules  for  Pronunciation,  pp.  8-13. 

3.— THE  GENDER  OF  NOUNS. 

In  Hindustani,  Nouns  are  either  Masculine  or  Feminine. 
There  is  no  Neuter  Gender.  Naturally  Nouns  relating  to 
males  are  Masculine,  and  Nouns  relating  to  females  are 
Feminine.  For  the  rest  no  definite  rules  can  be  given,  but 
it  may  be  assumed  that  the  majority  of  the  names  of  things 
are  Masculine,  and  also  almost  all  Nouns  ending  in  long  a. 
Nouns  ending  in  1  or  t  are  generally  Feminine. 

There  are,  however,  many  exceptions.  In  the  Vocabularies,  the 
gender  (where  necessary),  is  indicated  by  m.  or  f.  after  the  Noun. 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY.  15 


luggage         asbab,  m. 


as-  bah  b 


room  kamra,  m. 


kam-rah 


book  kitab,  f. 


kit-abb 


address          pata,  m. 
pa-tab 

hotel  hotal,  m. 

hoh-tal 

town  shaihar,  m. 

sbai-bar 

street  gall,  f. 

gal-ee 

house  ghar,  m. 

(or  home)    g'har 

*kh  (underlined)  has  the  guttural  sound  of  c  a  as  in  the  Scotch  word  LOCH, 
not  of  CH  as  in  the  word  CHURCH, — see  Rules  for  Pronunciation,  p.  10. 


newspaper    akhbar,    m. 


ab'ch-bahr 


telegram        tar,  m. 


tahr 


NOTE.  —  The  stress  or  accent  is  not  very  pronounced  in 
Hindustani,  but  as  a  rule  a  long  final  vowel  is  accentuated  a  little 
stronger  than  the  rest  of  the  word. 


AND    aiir  (awr)  IN    men  (may*?) 

1. 

Translate  each  phrase  and  compare  with  the  corresponding  English  below. 

1.  ek  kamra,  yeh  kamra,  wuh  kamra  ;  2.  pata, 
ek  pata,  wuh  pata  ;  3.  gall,  yeh  gall,  ek  gall  ; 
4.  kitab,  ek  kitab,  wuli  kitab  ;  5.  ek  shaihar,  wuli 
shaihar,  shaihar  men;  6.  ghar,  yeh  ghar,  wuh  ghar. 

la. 

1.  a  room,  this  room,  that  room  ;  2.  the  address,  an 
address,  that  address  ;  3.  the  street,  this  street,  a  street  ; 
4.  the  book,  a  book,  that  book  ;  5.  a  town,  that  town, 
in  the  town  (literally  town  in)  ;  6.  the  house,  this  house, 
that  house.  _ 

2. 

(The  Verb  is  placed  at  the  end  of  the  phrase.) 

1.  hotal  kahafi.  hai  ?  2.  asbab  yahafi.  hai  ;  3. 
akhbar  yahan  nahm  hai  •,  4.  shaihar  men  ek 
gali  ;  5.  ek  akhbar  aur  ek  tar  ;  6.  wuh  kitab 
vahafi  hai. 


16 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 


2a. 

1.  where  is  the  hotel  ?  2.  the  luggage  is  here  ;  3.  the 
newspaper  is  not  here  ;  4.  a  street  in  the  town  (lit.  town 
in,  one  street)  ;  5.  a  newspaper  and  a  telegram  ;  6.  the 
book  is  there.  

POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS. 

4. — These  Pronouns  have  different  terminations,  to 
agree  in  Gender  and  Number  with  the  Noun  to  which 
they  refer.  The  terminations  are  : 

a  (ah)  6  (ay)  1  (ee) 


MASCULINE 

MASCULINE 

FEMININE 

SINGULAB. 

PLURAL. 

SING.  &  PLCU. 

MY 

mera 

inay-rah 

mere 

may-ray 

meri 

may-ree 

HIS,  HER 

uska 

us-kah 

uske 

us-kay 

uski 

us-kee 

OUR 

hamara 

ham-ah-rah 

hamare 

bam-ah-ray 

hamari 

ham-ah-ree 

YOUR 

(ordinary  and 
intimate  forms) 

tumhara 

tum-hah-rah 

tumhare 

tuin-hah-ray 

tumhari 

turn-hah-ree 

YOUR 
(respectful  and 
polite  forms) 

apka 

abp-kah 

apke 

abp-kay 

apki 

ahp-kee 

THEIR 

unka 

un-kab 

unke 

un-kay 

unki 

un-kee 

3. 

1.  tumhara  grhar,  mera  pata  ;    2.  uska 
uski  kitab ;     3.  apka  asbab  aur  hamara  asbab  ; 

4.  unka   hotal,   uska   kamra;     5.  hamari  gali, 
hamara  shaihar ;     6.  meri  kitab  aur  mera  tar. 

3a. 

1.  your  house,  my  address ;    2.  his  newspaper,  his  book  ; 
3.  your  luggage  and  our  luggage  ;  4.  their  hotel,  her  room  ; 

5.  our  street,  our  town  ;      6.  my  book  and  my  telegram. 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


17 


man 

admi 

son 

beta 

(in  general) 

ahd-mee 

bay-  tab 

man 

mard 

daughter 

beti 

(as  opposed  to  woman)     mard 

bay-tee 

woman 

aurat 

brother 

bha'i 

aw-rat 

b'hah-ee 

father 

bap 

sister 

baihin 

bahp 

bai'hn  or  bai-bin 

mother 

man 

boy 

larka 

mahuff 

lar-kab 

child 

bachcha 

girl 

larki 

bach-chah 

lar-kee 

parents 

man  bap 

house 

makan,  m. 

mahnp  bahp 

(building) 

ma-kahn 

4. 

1.  mera  bap ;  2.  tumhari  man  ;  3.  unke  man 
bap ;  4.  hamara  ghar  ;  5.  uski  kitab ;  6.  meri 
beti ;  7.  uska  beta  ;  8.  apka  bha'i ;  9.  tumhara 
bachcha ;  10.  ek  mard  aur  ek  aurat ;  11.  yen 
larka  aur  wuh  larki ;  12.  tumhari  baihin  aur 

mera  bha'i. 

4a. 

1.  my  father  ;  2.  your  mother  ;  3.  their  parents  ;  4. 
our  house  ;  5.  his  book  ;  6.  my  daughter  ;  7.  her  son  ; 
8.  your  brother  ;  9.  your  child  ;  10.  a  man  and  a  woman  ; 
11.  this  boy  and  that  girl ;  12.  your  sister  and  my  brother. 


THE    DAYS    OF    THE    WEEK. 


SUNDAY 

MONDAY 

TUESDAY 

WEDNESDAY 

THURSDAY 

FRIDAY 

SATURDAY 


Itvar  (it-vabr) 

Somvar  (som-vahr) 

Mangal  (man-gal)  or  Mangalvar  ( man-gal- vahr) 

Budh  (bud'h)  or  Budhvar  (bud'b-vahr) 

Brihaspat  (bri-has-pat)  or  Jumerat  (jum-ay-raht) 

Shukravar  (shuk-ra-vahr)  or  Juma  (ju-mah) 

Sanichar  (san-ee-cbar)  or  Bar  (babr) 


18  HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 


SECOND    LESSON. 


6.— RULES  FOR  THE   PLURAL    OF    NOUNS. 

(NOMINATIVE  CASE) 

1.  Masculine  Nouns  generally  remain  unchanged  in  the 

Plural,  as  : 

man,  mard  ;  men,  mard 

2.  Nouns  ending  in  a  change  a  into  6,  as  : 

boy,  larka  (lar-kah)  ;  boys,  larke  0»r-kay) 

3.  Feminine  Nouns  ending  in  1,  add  an  (aW)  and  shorten 

the  1,  as  : 

girl,  larki  Oar-kee)  ;        girls,  larkian  (lar-ke-ahn?) 

4.  Feminine  Nouns  ending  in  any  letter  (except  l),  gene- 

rally add  en  (aynff),  as  : 

woman,  aurat  (aw-rat)  ;        women,  auraten  (aw-rat-ayn?) 

Other  Plural  Terminations  will  be  explained  as  they  occur. 

EXAMPLES. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

town  shaihar,  m.  towns  shaihar 

house  makan,  m.  houses  makau 

address          pata,  m.  addresses        pate 

room  kamra,  m.  rooms  kamre 

street  gall,  f.  streets  galian 

daughter       beti,  f .  daughters       betian 

book  kitab,  f.  books  kitaben 

5. 

1.  auraten  aur  larkian ;  2.  mard  aur  larke ; 
3.  shaihar  men  g-alian  ;  4.  kitaben  aur  akhbar ; 

5.  pate  aur  tar ;    6.  hotal  men  kamre. 

5a. 

1.  the  women  and  the  girls  ;  2.  the  men  and  the  boys ; 
3.  the  streets  in  the  town  (lit.  town  in,  the  streets)  ;  4.  the 
books  and  the  newspapers  ;  5.  the  addresses  and  the  tele- 
grams ;  6.  the  rooms  in  the  hotel  (lit.  hotel  in,  the  rooms). 


HUGO  8   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


19 


6. — The  words  ka  (kah),  ke  (kay),  kl  (kee),  meaning  OP, 
indicate  the  Possessive  Case.  They  are  best  rendered  in 
English  by  the  apostrophe  '  S  '  Os)  after  the  Noun. 


MASC.  SINGULAR. 

ka 


MASC.  PLURAL. 

ke 


FEM.  SING.  AND  PLUR. 

ki 


The  person  or  thing  owned  or  possessed  regulates  the 
tender  and  the  number,  thus  : 

the  sister's  house  baihin  ka  gliar 

the  brother's  daughter  bb.a'1  kl  betl 

the  father's  rooms  bap  ke  kamre 

6. 

1.  admi  ka  pata ;  2.  aurat  ka  beta ; 
ki  kitab  ;  4.  bap  ke  bachche ;  5.  uski 
asbab;  6.  larki  ka  kamra. 

6a. 

1.  the  man's  address;-  2.  the  woman's  son  ;  3.  the 
girl's  book  ;  4.  the  father's  children  ;  5.  his  mother's 
luggage  ;  6.  the  girl's  room. 


3.  larki 
man  ka 


7. — Plural  Nouns  followed  bv_ka,  ke  or  k£add  On  (on,,), 
but  if  the  singular  form  ends  in  a,  this  final  a  is  dropped 
and  On  added.  Examples  : 

the  rooms  of  the  houses 

(literally  :  houses  of,  rooms) 
the  houses  of  the  streets 

(lit.  streets  of,  houses) 

larkon  (NOT  larkaon)  ki     the  books  of  the  boys 
kitaben  (lit.  boys  of,  books) 


gharon  ke  kamre 
gallon  ke  makan 


letter 

chitthi,  f. 

table 

mez,  f  . 

chit-t'bee 

mayz 

friend 

dOSt,  m.  &  f. 

chair 

kursi,  f  . 

dohst 

kur-see 

ticket 

rel  tikat,  m. 

door 

darvaza,  m. 

(railway) 

rayl-tick-at 

dar-vah-zah 

stamp 

dak  tikat,  m. 

window 

khirki,  £. 

(postage) 

dahk-tick-at 

k'hir-kee 

20 HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI  MADE   EAST. 

7. 

1.  meri  dost  ka  rel  tikat ;  2.  tumharl  man  ki 
chitthian ;  3.  makan  ke  darvaze  aur  khirkian ; 
4.  ap  ke  dak  tikat;  5.  meri  baihin  ki  mezen 
aur  kursian ;  6.  bachchon  ki  kitab  mez  par 
(on)  hai  ;  7.  uske  doston  ka  grhar  shaihar  men 
hai ;  8.  hamara  asbab  hotal  men  nahin  hai 

7a. 

1.  my  friend's  railway-ticket ;  2.  your  mother's  letters  ; 
3.  the  doors  and  windows  of  the  house  (=houseof,  doors 
and  windows)  ;  4.  your  postage-stamps  ;  5.  my  sister's 
tables  and  chairs  ;  6.  the  children's  book  is  on  the  table  ; 
7.  her  friends'  house  is  in  the  town  ;  8.  our  luggage  is  not 
in  the  hotel. 


1.  ok; 

ayk 

2.  do; 

doh 

3.  tin  ; 

teen 

4.  char  ; 

chahr 

5.  panch  ; 

pahnfl'ch 

6.  chhe*; 

ch'hay 

7.  sat  ; 

saht 

8.  ath  ; 

aht'h 

9.  nan  ; 

naw 

10.  das  ; 

das 

11.  gyarah  •, 

gyah-ra'h 

12.  barah. 

bah-ra'h 

'Pronounce  CH  as  in  the  word  CHtJBCH,  and  aspirate  the  H  following, 
in  the  same  breath. 

1.  do  kamre ;  2.  char  chitthian  ;  3.  sat  mard ; 
4.  chhe  kitaben;  5.  ath  akhbar;  6.  gyarah 
makan ;  7.  tin  mezen  aur  barah  kursian ;  8. 
panch  dost ;  9.  das  dak  tikat ;  10.  ek  makan 

men  nau  darvaze. 

8a. 

1.  two  rooms  ;  2.  four  letters ;  3.  seven  men  ;  4.  six 
books  ;  5.  eight  newspapers  ;  6.  eleven  houses  ;  7.  three 
tables  and  twelve  chairs  ;  8.  five  friends  ;  9.  ten  postage 
stamps  ;  10.  nine  doors  in  one  house. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 


THIRD    LESSON. 


8.— PRONOUNS  for  the  NOMINATIVE  (Subject). 


SINGULAR. 

main 


HE    ) 
SHE/ 


vo'b 


wuh 


IT 


(yay'h) 
WUh  (vo'h) 


PLURAL. 

WE  ham 

bam 

YOU  tum  (turn) 

(ordinary  and  intimate  form) 

YOU  ap  (ahp) 

(respectful  and  polite  form) 


THEY 


ve 


vay 


NOTE. — yeh  and  wuh  also  stand  for  THIS  and  THAT. 

V6,  yell  and  wuh  also  stand  for  THESE  and  THOSE. 


9.  —  hOna  (hoh-nah)    TO   BE. 
PRESENT    TENSE. 


I  AM 

HE  IS   1 
SHE  IS] 

IT  IS 


SINGULAR. 

main  hun 

hoo»0 


wuh  hai 

vo'h  hai 

yeh  or  wuh  hai 

yay'h  vo'h  hai 


WE  ARE 


YOU  ARKS 


THEY  ARE 


PLURAL. 

ham  ham 

ham  haine 

(    turn*  ho 

turn  ho 

ap  hain 

ahp  bain0 

ve  hain 


vay 


*The  word  log  (lohg)  PEOPLE,  is  sometimes  added  after  turn,  to  give 
a  definite  plural  sense. 

NOTE. — There  is  a  third  form  for  the  second  person  (the  fami- 
liar form),  but  its  use  should  be  avoided  by  foreigners.  This 
familiar  form  is  given  later, — see  Index. 


WHO  ? 


kaun  ? 


kawu 


WHAT  ?         kya*  ? 

kyah 


*  When  asking  a  question  the  word  kya  ?  WHAT  ?  generally  precedes 
the  subject  of  the  sentence.  But  kya  is  not  used  when  another  inter- 
rogative word  is  introduced  in  the  sentence,  such  as  :  kaun  ?  WHO  f 
kahafi  ?  WHKBK  f 


22 

HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE 

EASY. 

ready 
busy 

taiyar 

tai-yahr 

masruf 

mas-roof 

wrong 
glad 

ghalat* 

h'ra-lat 

khusht 

h'chush 

righj 

thik 

I'heek 

also 

bhi 

b'hee 

*gh  (underlined)  has  the  sound  of  a  strongly  aspirated  h  followed  by  a 
rattling  sound  as  of  r.  This  sound  is  imitated  by  h'r. 

tkh  (underlined)  has  the  guttural  sound  of  CH  in  the  Scotch  word 
LOCH,  preceded  by  a  strongly  aspirated  h.  This  sound  is  imitated  by  h'ch. 
See  also  Rules  for  Pronunciation. 

9. 

1.  main  khush  nun  ;  2.  ap  thik  ham  or  turn 
thik  ho ;  3.  wuh  ghalat  hai ;  4.  ham  masruf 
hain  ;  5.  kya  ap  masruf  hain  ?  6.  wuh  taiyar 
nahm  hai ;  7.  ham  taiyar  hain ;  8.  wuh  khush 
hai ;  9.  ham  khush  nahm  hain ;  10.  kya  wuh 
taiyar  hai  ?  11.  ve  taiyar  nahm  hain ;  12.  yahan 
kaun  hai  ?  13.  main  yahan  hun ;  14.  ve  bhi 
yahan  hain ;  15.  yeh  kahan  hai  ? 

9a. 

1.  I  am  glad  ;  2.  you  are  right ;  3.  that  is  wrong  or 
he  is  wrong  ;  4.  we  are  busy  ;  5.  are  you  busy  ?  6.  she 
is  not  ready  ;  7.  we  are  ready  ;  8.  he  is  glad  ;  9.  we  are 
not  glad  ;  10.  is  he  ready  ?  11.  they  are  not  ready  ;  12. 
who  is  here  ?  13.  I  am  here ;  14.  they  are  also  here  ; 
15.  where  is  it  ? 


Literally  the  above  phrases  would  read : 
1. 1  glad  am  ;  2.  you  right  are  ;  3.  that  or  he  wrong  is  ; 
4.  we  busy  are  ;  5.  wkat  you  busy  are  ?  6.  she  ready  not 
is ;  7.  we  ready  are  ;  8.  he  glad  is ;  9.  we  glad  not  are  ; 
10.  what  he  ready  is  ?  11.  they  ready  not  are  ;  12.  here  who 
is  ?  13  I  here  am  ;  14.  they  also  here  are  ;  15.  it  where  is  ? 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE  EASY.  23 

10. — PAST  TENSE  of  hona,  TO  BE. 

MASC.  SING.  FEM.  SINO.  MASC.  PLUB.  FEM.  PLUB. 

tha  thi  the  thin 

t'hah  t'hee  t'hay 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 


I  WAS  main  tha  (or  thi) 

HE  WAS        wuh  tha 

SHE  WAS          WUh   thi 

IT  WAS  y eh  (or  wuh)  tha  (or  thi) 


WE  WEEK         ham  the  (or  thin) 
turn  the  (or  thin) 


YOU  WERE 


ap  the  (or  thin) 
THEY  WERE  ye  the  (or  thin) 


NOTE. — In  this  tense,  tha  or  the  is  used  when  the  Subject  is  Mascu- 
line ;  thi  or  thin  is  used  when  the  Subject  is  Feminine.  As  a  general 
rule,  the  verb  airrees  with  its  subject  in  gender  and  number.  In  the  case 
of  the  first  person  plural  WE  WERE,  ham  the  is  often  used  for  both 
Masculine  and  Feminine. 


AT  HOME  or  AT  THE  HOUSE        ghar  par 

g'har  par 

AT  or  IN  THE  OFFICE  daftar  men 

daf-tar  may»v 

10. 

1.  kya  ap  vahan  the  (or  thin)  ?  2.  ham  g'har 
par  the  (or  thin) ;  3.  ve  yahan  the  (or  thin) ; 
4.  wuh  yahan  nahm  thi ;  5.  wuh  kahan  hai  ? 
6.  wuh  kahan  tha  ?  7.  main  vahan  nahin  tha  ; 
8.  wuh  ghar  par  nahm  thi;  9.  wuh  daftar 

men  tha. 

lOa. 

1.  were  you  there  ?  2.  we  were  at  home ;  3.  they 
were  here ;  4.  she  was  not  here  ;  5.  where  is  he  ?  6. 
where  was  he  ?  7.  I  was  not  there  ;  8.  she  was  not  at 
home  ;  9.  he  was  at  the  office. 


Literally  the  above  phrases  would  read : 
1.  what  you  there  were  ?    2.  we  house  at  were  ;   3.  they  here 
were ;    4.  she  here  not  was ;   5.  he  where  is  ?    6.  he  where  was  ? 
7. 1  there  not  was  ;   8.  she  house  at  not  was  ;    9.  he  office  in  was. 


24  HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


FOURTH    LESSON. 


11. — The  verb  TO  HAVE  is  not  used  in  Hindustani. 
When  in  English  TO  HAVE  means  '  to  own  or  to  possess,' 
as  :  '  I  have  a  book,'  it  is  rendered  in  Hindustani  by  the 
word  pas  (pahs),  which  implies  possession  or  ownership,  and 
is  followed  by  the  Present  or  Past  Tense  of  hona,  TO  BE. 

In  this  construction  the  Possessive  Pronouns  are  used, 
(see  page  1 6)  and  these  must  invariably  end  in  6.  The  verb 
is  in  the  THIRD  Person  Singular  or  Plural  as  the  case  may 
require.  Examples  : 

I  have  a  book  mere  pas  ek  kitab  hai 

=in  my  possession  a  book  is 

he  has  a  book  uske  pas  ek  kitab  hai 

=in  his  possession  a  book  is 

we  have  books  hamare  pas  kitabefi  haifi 

=in  our  possession  books  are 

The  phrase  is  thus  placed  in  the  POSSESSIVE  CASE,  and  the  person  or 
thing  owned  or  possessed  becomes  the  SUBJECT  of  the  sentence,  as  : 
a  book  in  my  possession  is 

11. 

1.  mere  pas  ek  chitthi  hai ;  2.  mere  pas  ek 
chitthi  'thi ;  3.  mere  pas  chitthian  thm ;  4. 
uske  pas  ek  ghar  hai ;  5.  uske  pas  ek  grhar  tha  ; 
6.  unke  pas  grhar  nahm  hai. 

lla. 

1.  I  have  a  letter  ;  2.  I  had  a  letter  ,  3.  I  had  letters ; 
4.  he  has  a  house  ;  5.  he  had  a  house  ;  6.  they  have 
no  house.  

12.— If  a  NOUN  takes  the  place  of  the  PRONOUN,  the 
word  ke  (kay)  is  inserted  before  pas.  When  used  in 
this  construction,  ke,  which  means  OF,  is  INVARIABLE. 

EXAMPLES. 

the  man  has  a  newspaper  admi  ke  pas  ek  akhbar  hai 

=in  possession  of  the  man  a  newspaper  is 

the  man  has  newspapers  admi  ke  pas  akhbar  haiii 

=in  possession  of  the  man  newspapers  are 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


25 


white  man 

gora,*  m. 

milk 

dudh,  m. 

(European) 

goh-rah 

dood'h 

horse 

ghora,*  m. 

rice 

chaval,  m. 

g'hoh-rah 

chah-val 

water 

pani,  m. 

egg 

anda,  m. 

pah-nee 

an-dah 

bread 

roti,  f. 

butter 

makkhan,  m. 

roh-tee 

m.ak-k'han 

*Carefully  note  the  difference  between  gora  (white  man)  and  ghora 
(horse).  In  the  latter  case  the  h  after  g  should  be  distinctly  heard. 

The  word  gora  chiefly  applies  to  European  soldiers  and  sailors.  It 
does  not  (as  a  rule)  apply  to  a  European  of  rani,  who  is  usually  spoken 
of  as  sahib  (sah-hib),  sir. 

12. 

1.  mere  bap  ke  pas  ghore  hain ;  2.  apke  bhJTi 
ke  pas  ek  ghora  hai ;  3.  gore*  ke  pas  ghore 
nahin  the ;  4.  aurat  ke  pas  roti  aur  dudh  hai ; 
5.  larki  ke  pas  makkhan  aur  ande  hain* ;  6. 
meri  man  ke  pas  ghar  men  roti  nahifl  thi ; 
7.  unke  pas  ek  kamra  hai ;  8.  hamare  pas  char 
kamre  the. 

*Nouns  ending  in  a  change  a  into  e  before  ke. 

12a. 

1.  my  father  has  horses  ;  2.  your  brother  has  a  horse  ; 
3.  the  white  man  had  no  horses  ;  4.  the  woman  has  bread 
jnd  milk  ;  5.  the  girl  has  butter  and  eggs  ;  6.  my  mother 
had  no  bread  in  the  house  ;  7.  they  have  a  room  ;  8.  we 
had  four  rooms. 

More  literally  the  above  phrases  would  read : 
1.  my  father's  possession  in,  horses  are  ;  2.  your  brother's 
possession  in,  a  horse  is  ;  3.  the  white  man's  possession  in,  no 
horses  were  ;  4.  the  woman's  possession  in,  bread  and  milk  is  ; 
5.  the  girl's  possession  in,  butter  and  eggs  are  ;  6.  my  mother's 
possession  in,  the  house  in,  no  bread  was  ;  etc. 


26 

HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   BAST. 

price 

kimat,  f. 

kee-mat       (or  qlmat) 

yes                   hafi 

hahn 

time 

vakt,  m. 

vakt 

no,  not  any       nahin 

na-heen? 

money 

rupaya,  m. 

ru-pa-yah 

much,  many     bahut 
ba-hut 

thing 

chiz,  f  . 

cheez 

how  much  ?      kitna  (l)  ? 
kit-nah  (ee) 

enough 

kafT 

kah-fee 

how  many  ?      kitne  (l)  ? 

kit-nay  (ee) 

13. 

1.  kya  tumhare  pas  bahut  asbab  hai  ?  2.  mere 
pas  asbab  nahin  hai ;  3.  kya  tumhare  pas  tikat 
hain  ?  4.  nan,  mere  pas  tikat  hain ;  5.  unke 
pas  kitna  rupaya  hai?  6.  hamare  pas  kafi 
rupaya  nahin  tha ;  7.  tumhare  doston  ke  pas  ba- 
hut rupaya  hai ;  8.  uske  pas  kitni  chizen  thin  ? 

9.  chizon  ki  kya  kimat  hai  ?     10.  kya  tumhare 
pas  vakt  hai  ?    11.  mere  pas  bahut  vakt  nahm 
hai ;    12.  hamare  pas  kafi  vakt  tha. 

13a. 

1.  have  you  much  luggage  ?  2. 1  have  not  any  luggage  ; 
3.  have  you  the  tickets  ?  4.  yes,  I  have  the  tickets  ; 
5.  how  much  money  have  they  ?  6.  we  had  not  enough 
money  ;  7.  your  friends  have  much  money  ;  8.  how 
many  things  had  he  ?  9.  what  is  the  price  of  the  things  ? 

10.  have  you  time  ?      11.  I  have  not  much  time  ;      12.  we 
had  enough  time. 

Literally  the  above  phrases  would  read  : 
1.  what,  your  possession  in,  much  luggage  is  ?    2.  my  pos- 
session in,  not  any  luggage  is ;   etc. 

5.  their  possession  in,  how  much  money  is  ?  6.  our  posses- 
sion in,  enough  money  not  was ;  etc. 


HUGOS   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST. 


27 


CONVERSATIONAL    PHRASES. 


I  offer  you  respects. 
I  accept. 
Good-day. 
Good-bye. 
Pardon  me. 
How  are  you  ? 
I  am  well. 
Thank  God. 
I  am  not  well. 

Thank  you. 
Gome  here. 
Call  a  porter. 
Take  the  luggage. 
Be  careful. 
Lift  it  carefully. 


1.  Adab  araz. 

2.  Taslimat. 

3.  Salaxn. 

4.  Khuda  haflz. 

5.  Muaf  kijiye. 

6.  Ap  ke  mijaz  kaise  hain  ? 

7.  Achchha  hun. 

8.  Shukr  khuda  ka  hai. 

9.  Merl    tabiyat   achchhi 

nahin  hai. 

10.  Ap  ka  mashkur  hun. 

11.  Yahan  a'o.* 

12.  Ek  bharchak  bula'o. 

13.  Asbab  le'o. 

14.  Hoshiyar  ho'o. 

15.  Hoshiyari  se  yeh  utha'o. 


Imitated  Pronunciation  of  the  above  phrases. 


1  ah-dahb  a-raz 

2  tas-lee-raaht 

3  sa-lahm 

4  h'chud-ah  Lah-fiz 

5  mu-ahf  kee-je-yay 

6  ahp  kay  me-jahz  kai-say  hain$ 

7  ach-ch'hah  hoong 

8  shukr  h'chud-ah  kah  bai 


9  may-ree  ta-bee-yat  ach-ch'hee 
na-heer^  hai 

10  ahp  kah  mash-koor  hoong 

1 1  ja-hahng  ah-oh 

12  ayk  b'hahr-chack  bul-ah-oh 

13  aa-bahb  lay-oh 

14  hoh-shi-yahr  hoh-oh        [hah-oh 

15  hoh-shi-yah-ree    say  yay'h  ut- 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  phrases. 
1  =the  ordinary  greeting  ;      2  accepted  ;      3  peace  to  you  ;      4  God 
(be)  with  you  ;     5  pardon  do  please  (polite  Imperative)  ;     6  you  of  health 
how  are  ?       7  good  am  ;       8  thanks  to  God  be  ('  I  am  well '  being  under- 
stood) ;     9  my  condition  good  not  is  ;      10  to  you  grateful  am  ;     11  here 
come  ;       12  a  porter  call ;      13  luggage  take  ;      14  careful  be  ;      15  care 
with  it  lift. 
'The  final  o  in  the  last  fire  phrases  indicates  the  ordinary  Imperative. 


28  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE  EAST. 

EASY    READING, 

with  Imitated  Pronunciation,  Literal  Translation  and 
Correct  English  Rendering. 


Ek    roz    grarmi  ke   mausim   men,   ek  badshah 

ayk       robz       gar-mee      kay        maw-Kim         ni&yng     ayk     bahd-shah'b 

One    day     summer    of        season           in         a         king 
aur   uska   beta   shikar-khelne    ko   gaye.     Jab 

swr       us-kah     bay-tab      she-kuhr-k'hayl-nay       kob      ga-yay  jab 

and      his         son  hunting  to      went.      When 

hava  bahut  garm  hu'i,  to  un  donofi.  ne  apna-apna 

ha-vab      ba-hut      garm       bu-ee  tob     un  doh-nony  nay  ap-nab  ap-uah 
the  air    very       hot  became,  then  them  both  by    his-hia 

choghji  ek  maskhare   ki   kamar    par   dal-diya. 

chob-b'rab  ayk     mas-b'cha-ray      kee       ka-mar       par       dahl-de-yah 
cloak           a         jester  of        back        on  laid. 

Badshah     ne    hans-kar    kaha :    Ai !    maskhare 

babd-sbab'b        nay        ban^s-kar         ka-bab  ai        maa-b'cba-ray 

The  king        by      laugh  doing     said  :        Oh !      jester 

tumhari    kamar  par,    ek    gradhe    ka   bojh   hai. 

tum-hah-ree       ka-mar        par        ayk      gad-bay      kab     bobdj'h     hai 
your  back       on,       one        ass         of    burden    is. 

Maskhare   ne   jawab   diya :    Hazur   sach-muob 

mas-b'cha-ray      nay      ja-vabb      di-yab  ba-zoor         sacb-much 

The  jester        by        reply      gave :    Your  Majesty    verily 

main    do    gudhon   ke    bojh    utha-raha    him. 

main?        dob      gad-hotv       kay    bobdj'h      ut-hah-ra-hah       hoo*g 
I  two       asses         of    burdens    carrying  am. 

Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 
On  a  summer's  day  a  king  and  his  son  went  hunting.  When 
it  became  very  hot,  both  put  their  cloaks  on  to  the  back  of  a 
jester.  The  king  laughingly  said :  Jester,  you  carry  an  ass's 
burden  on  your  back.  The  jester  answered :  Verily,  Your 
Majesty,  I  am  carrying  two  asses'  burdens. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST. 


29 


Ek    ganvar    ne    ek    Samba!    vale    se    puchha 

ayk       gaiw-vahr      nay     ayk      bam-ba-ee      vah-lay    say      pooch-bah 
A    countryman  by,      a        Bombay        man    from      asked 


kl1: 

ke 
(that)  : 


Turn 

turn 
You 


safar    kiya 

sa-far        ke-yah 
journey      done 


ne 

nay 
by 

hai 

bai 
is: 


bahut 

ba-but 
many 

zara 

za-rah 
just 


dafa" 

da-fab 
times 


samandar 

ea-rnan-dar 

ocean 


ka 

kah 
Of 


yeh    to* 

yay'h      toh 
this    (now) 


bata'iye    ki 

bat-ah-e-yay      ke 
say  please  (that) 


turn 

turn 

you 
Usne 

us-nay 
He 

bahut 

ba-but 
many 


ne 

nay 
by 


kya-kya3    ajib    chizen 

kyah-kyah        a-jeeb       cheez-en0 
what-what  wonderful  things 


dekhi 

dek-bee 
seen 


hain. 

hainy 

are. 


jawab 

ja-vahb 
reply 


diya     ki  : 

de-yah        ke 
gave    (that) 


Main    ne    ajube    to 

main0        nay    a-joo-bay    toh 
I  by=by  me    wonders  very 


dekhe 

dek-hay 

seen 


sab-se-bara       yeh 

sab-say-ba-rah  yay'h 

all  more  than  great  this 


hain, 

hai  ny 

are, 
hai 

hai 


IS 


ki 

ke 
that 


lekin 

lay-kin 

but 
main 

main? 
I 


un 

un 

them 


men 

mayn? 
among 


salamati    se 

sa-lah-ma-tee    say 
safety       with 


sahal      par      zinda      pahunch-gaya      hun. 

sah-hal  par  zin-dah  pa-hun<rch  ga-yah  boon? 

shore          on  alive  arrived  am. 

1  in  a  narrative,  ki  (that)  generally  precedes  a  quotation  ;  2  the 
word  to  is  not  always  translatable  ;  in  many  cases  it  is  used  simply  to 
give  emphasis  ;  3  the  repetition  of  a  word  intensifies  its  meaning. 

Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 
A  countryman  said  to  a  man  from  Bombay  :  You  have  many 
times  travelled  on  (=crossed)  the  ocean,  please  tell  me  what 
wonderful  things  you  have  seen.  He  answered :  I  have  seen 
many  wonders,  but  the  greatest  of  all  is  that  I  got  back  safely  to 
shore. 


30 


HUGOS  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EAST. 


Ek    Ithargosh 

ne     ek    sherni 

ke     samne    ja 

ayk       h'char-gohsh 

nay      ayk      shair-nee 

kay      sahm-nay     jah 

A            hare 

by        a        tigress 

of       presence  gone 

kar      us     se 

kaha     ki  :     Ai 

sherni  !    mere 

kar            us        say 

ka-hah         ke            ai 

shair-nee      may-ray 

having  her     to 

said    (that)  ;       Oh 

tigress  !        of  me 

ek    sal    men    ka'i    bachche    hote    hain,  magar 

ayk    sahl       majng      ka-ee         bach-chay     hoh-tay      hain;         ma-gar 

one   year      in       several        young  are,  while 


tumhare 

tumhari 

kul 

zindgi 

men    do 

ya 

tum-hah-ray 

tum-hah-ree 

kul 

zind-guee 

maynj?      doh 

yah 

of  you 

your 

whole 

life 

in        two 

or 

tin     se 

ziyada 

nahm 

hote. 

Sherni 

ne 

teen        say 

zi-yah-dah 

na-heenff 

hoh-tay 

sliair-nee 

nay 

three  than 

more 

not 

are, 

The  tigress 

by 

muskara    kar    jawab  diya,  ki  .    Jo 

mus-kah-rah       kar        ja-vahb    de-yah      ke        job 
smile            doing     answer    gave  (that)  : 

kaihti     ho      sach     hai  ;      beshak 

kuchh  turn 

kuch'h        turn 
All              you 

meri     kul 

kai'h-tee 

bob         sach             hai 

bay-sbak 

may-ree        kul 

said 

have      true          is  ; 

indeed 

my 

whole 

zindgi     men     mere     sirf     ek     bachcha     hota 

zind-guee        may»v    may-ray        sirf         ayk        bach-chah       hob -tab 
life  in         of  me       only      one        young  be 


hai,     lekin 

bai  lay-kin 

may,        but 


wuh     ek     sher     hota     hai. 

vo'b         ayk        shair        bob-tab        hai 
that       one        tiger  is. 


Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 
A  hare  having  gone  into  the  presence  of  a  tigress,  said  to  her  : 
Oh,  tigress,  I  have  several  young  in  one  year,  but  you  in  your 
whole  life  have  no  more  than  two  or  three.  The  tigress  laughing, 
replied  :  All  that  you  have  said  is  true  ;  in  all  my  whole  life  I 
may  have  only  one  young,  but  that  one  is  a  tiger. 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MALIE    EASY. 


FIFTH    LESSON. 


ADJECTIVES, 
rich  amir  large  bara 


a-meer 


poor  gharfb 

h'ra-reeb 

dear  maihiiffa 

mai-henj-gah 

cheap  sasta 

sas-tah 


bar-ah 

small,  little       chhota 
cb'boh-tah 

good  achchha 

ach-ch'hah 

bad        bura  or  kharab 

bur-ah,  h'char-ahb 


13. — Adjectives  ending  in  a  consonant  are  invariable. 

14. — Adjectives  ending  in  a  take  the  Gender  and  Num- 
ber of  the_  Noun  to  which  they  belong,  according  to  the 
rules  of  ka,  ke,  kl.  Examples  : 

a  large  house  ek  bara  makan 

a  small  street  ek  chhoti  gall 

good  rooms  achchhe  kamre 

14. 

nahln  (NOT)  stands  at  the  end  of  the  sentence,  just  before  the  verb. 

1.  wuh  admi  amir  hai ;  2.  ve  admi  amir 
nahln  hain  ;  3.  shaihar  bara  hai ;  4.  yen  shai- 
har  bara  nahin  hai ;  5.  wuh  chhota  hai ;  6.  yeh 
aurat  giiarib  hai ;  7.  gharlb  auraten  ;  8.  chhote 
bachche  ;  9.  ek  achchha  larka  ;  10.  wuh  larka 
kharab  hai ;  11.  yeh  larke  bure  nahln  hain ; 
12.  achchhe  larke,  achchhi  larkian. 

14a. 

1.  that  man  is  rich ;  2.  these  men  are  not  rich  ;  3.  the 
town  is  large  ;  4.  this  town  is  not  large  ;  5.  it  is  small ; 
6.  this  woman  is  poor  ;  7.  the  poor  women  ;  8.  little 
children  ;  9.  a  good  boy  ;  10.  that  boy  is  bad  ;  11.  these 
boys  are  not  bad  ;  12.  good  boys,  g  >od  girls. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE    EASY. 


country  mulk,  m. 

mulk 

language  zuban,  f. 

zub-ahn 


garden  bagh,  m. 

bah'r 

fruit  phal,  m. 

p'hal 

flower  phul,  m. 

p'hool 

lesson  sabaq,  m. 

sa-back 

NOTE. — Remember  that  h  following  any  consonant  must  always  be 
heard,  never  ignored.  In  the  Imitated  Pronunciation  this  ia  indicated  by 
an  apostrophe  between  the  two  letters, — as  p'h. 


climate 
journey 


abohava,  f. 

ahb-o-ha-vah 


sa-far 


safar,  m. 


long  lamba 

lam-bah 

short  chhota 

ch'hoh-tah 

warm  garm 

garm 

cold  thanda 

t'han-dah 


ADJECTIVES  (continued). 
easy 


asan 


ah-sahn 

difficult  mushkil 

mush-kil 

beautiful         khubsurat 

h'choob-soo-rat 

abundant          bakasrat 

ba-kas-rat 


15. 


1.  yen  kamra  garm  hai ;  2.  ve  kamre  thande 
haifi ;  3.  bagh  khubsurat  hai ;  4.  ek  chhota  safar ; 
'>.  lambe  safar ;  6.  safar  lamba  hai ;  7.  yeh  sabaq 
asan  hai ;  8.  zuban  mushkil  hai ;  9.  khubsurat 
phul ;  10.  achchha  phal ;  11.  yeh  chizefi  sasti 
haifi;  12.  wuh  chizen  maihngi  hain;  13.  kya 
yeh  kitaben  sasti  haifi  ?  14.  han,  yeh  sasti  haifi 

aur  achchhi  haifi. 

15a. 

1.  this  room  is  warm  ;  2.  these  rooms  are  cold  ;  3.  the 
garden  is  beautiful ;  4.  a  short  (= small)  journey  ;  5.  long 
journeys  ;  6.  the  journey  is  long  ;  7.  this  lesson  is  easy  ;  8. 
the  language  is  difficult ;  9.  beautiful  flowers ;  10.  good  fruit ; 
11.  these  things  are  cheap  ;  12.  those  things  are  dear  ;  13.  are 
these  books  cheap  ?  14.  yes,  they  are  cheap  and  they  are  good. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADB  EASY. 83 

_16. 

1.  Hindustan  khubsurat  mulk  hai.  2.  Abohava 
achchhi  hai.  3.  Hindustan  ke  bagh  khubsurat 
hain.  4.  Safar  lamba  hai  aur  mushkil  hai. 

5.  Zuban   asan    nahin   hai.      6.  Phal   aur   phul 
rahan  bakasrat  hain. 

16a. 

1.  India  is  a  beautiful  country.  2.  The  climate  is  good. 
3.  The  gardens  of  (=in)  India  are  beautiful.  4.  The 
journey  is  long  and  difficult.  5.  The  language  is  not  easy. 

6.  Fruit  and  flowers  are  abundant  there. 


name 

nam,  m. 

nahm 

hungry           bhukha 

b'hoo-k'hah 

word 

lafz.  m. 

lafz 

thirsty            pyasa 

pyah-sah 

food 

khana,  m. 

k'hah-nah 

some,  any         kuohh 
kutch'h 

17. 

1.  main  bhukha  nahin  nun ;  2.  wuh  pyasa 
hai ;  3.  ham  bhukhe  aur  pyase  the ;  4.  kya 
tumhare  pas  kuchh  khana  hai  ?  5.  mere  pas 
roti,  dudh  aur  chaval  hain ;  6.  apka  kya  nam 
hai  ?  7.  yeh  lafz  kya  hai  ?  8.  ve  lafz  kya  the  ? 
9.  kya  yeh  lafz  asan  hain  ?  10.  wuh  sabaq  mush- 
kil nahin  the. 

17a. 

1.  I  am  not  hungry  ;  2.  he  is  thirsty  ;  3.  we  were 
hungry  and  thirsty  ;  4.  have  you  any  (some)  food  (here)  ? 
5.  I  have  bread,  milk  and  rice  ;  6.  what  is  your  name  ? 
7.  what  is  this  word  ?  8.  what  were  those  words  ?  9.  are 
the  words  easy  ?  10.  those  lessons  were  not  difficult. 

H.8. — 2 


HUGO  S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


CONVERSATIONAL    PHRASES. 


Where  do  you  come  from  ?  1. 

Where  are  you  going  ?  2. 

Go  home  quickly  1  3. 

Turn  to  the  right.  4. 

Turn  to  the  left.  5. 

Bring  some  wine  -and  6. 

water. 

Cool  the  water.  7. 

Dinner   (food)    is    on  8. 

the  table. 

What  is  there  for  din-  9. 

ner(= to  eat)  to-day  ? 

This  bread  is  good.  10. 

The  meat  is  also  good.  11. 

Have  a  little  patience.  12. 

Bring  paper,  ink  and  13. 

pen. 


Turn  kahafi  se  ate  ho? 

Turn  kahafi  jate  lio  ? 

Ghar  jaldi  ja'o  ! 

Dahine  phiro. 

Baen  phiro. 

Kuchh  sharab  aur  pan! 

la'o. 

Pan!  thanda  karo. 
Khana   mez   par  hazir 
_hai. 

Aj  ka  khana  kya  hai? 

Yeh  rot!  achchhi  hai. 
Gosht  bhi  achchha  hai. 
Thora  sabr  karo. 
Kaghaz,  siyahi  aur  ka- 
lam  la'o. 


Imitated  Pronunciation  of  the  above  Phrases. 


1  turn  ka-hahnf  say  ah-tay  hob  ? 

2  turn  Iu-hahn0  jah-tay  hoh  ? 

3  g'bar  jal-dee  jab-ob 

4  dah-be-nay  p'bir-ob 

6  bah-ain<r  p'bir-oh 

$  kutch'h    sha-rahb    awr     pah-nee 
lah-ob 

7  pah-nee  t'han-dah  ka-roh 


8  k'hah-nab   mayz  par    hah-zir 

bai 

9  ahdj  kah  k'hab-nah  kyab  hai  f 

10  yay'h  roh-tee  ach-cb'hee  hai 

11  gohsbt  b'hee  ach-ch'hah  hai 

12  t'iioh-rah  sabr  ka-roh 

13  kah-h'raz,   se-yah-hee  awr  ka- 

lam  lah-oh 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  Phrases. 

1  ***joa  where  from  coming  are  ?  2  =you  where  going  are  ?  3  =house 
quickly  go  I  4  =right  turn  ;  5  =left  turn  ;  3 — 7  o  after  the  Stem  of  the 
Verb  indicates  the  Imperative,  as  :  la-o !  kar-o  !  8  dinner,  food  in 
general,  and  to  eat,  are  all  expressed  by  khana  ;  9  =to-day  to  eat  what 
to  f  IS  <>»patience  little  do. 


HUGO'S  HINDI'S!  AN  I    MADE  BAST. 


35 


EASY    READING, 

with  Imitated  Pronunciation,  Literal  Translation  and 
correct  English  Rendering. 

Ek    bahut    gharib    admi    ne1    ek    baliut    amir 

ayk        ba-hut        h'ra-reeb    ahd-mee     nay      ayk        ba-hut      a-meer 
A          very  poor          man  a          very        rich 


admi       ke-pas       ja-kar,       kaha     ki  :       Ham 

ahd-mee          kay-pahs              jab-kar              ka-hah        ke                 bam 
man                to  having  gone,               said        (that)  :        We 

Adam    o*    Hawwa    ke 

ah-dam        oh         hav-vah         kay 

Adam     and        Eve         of 

do    bete     haift  ;     turn 

dob      bay-tay      bain*              tun> 
two      sons        are  ;            you 

bahut     amir     ho,     aur 

ba-but         a-meer        hob         awr 
very            rich        are,       and 

main     bahut     gharfb 

miiing           ba-but            h'ra-reeb 
I              very            poor 

hufi.       Isliye    muj-he 

huonp            is-le-yay        muj-hay 
am.           Therefore        me 

ek    bha*i    ka-sa    hissa 

ayk      b'bah-ee     kah-sah       his-sah 
a      brother's      like        share 

do.       Amir    admi    ne 

doh            a-meer       ahd-mee      nay 
give.        The  rich  man 

yeh     sun-kar     gharib 

yay             sun-kar            h'ra-reeb 
this  heard  having            poor 

admi    ko    ek    kauri3    di.       Us    gharib    shakhs 


ahd-mee    kob    ayk 

kaw-ree      dee 

us        h'ra-reeb 

shalTchs 

man        to     one 

shell     gave. 

That        poor 

person 

ne     kaha  : 

Janab,     ap 

mujhko     ek 

bhal 

nay      ka-hah 

ja-nahb         alip 

muj'h-koh         ayk 

b'hah-ee 

said  : 

Sir,          you 

me  to          a 

brother'^ 

ka-sa    hissa 

kyufl     nahm 

dete    hain  ? 

Usne 

kah-sah      his-sah 

kyoonfl        na-heenj 

day-tay      liainj 

us-  nay 

like         share 

why            not 

givinsj      are  ? 

He 

1  ne  i«  not  always  translatable  ;      2  o  is  another  word  for  anr  (and)  j 
'•*  kauri,  a  very  small  coin. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST. 


jawab 

ja-vahb 

diya     ki  :       Mere1    bhale1    dost  !    sabir 

de-yah         ke            may-ray     b'hah-lay       dohst          sah-bir 

reply 

gave    (that)  :        My         worthy    friend  !     content 

bano. 

Agar 

main 

apne 

sab       gkarib 

ba-noh 

a-  gar 

mainj 

ap-nay 

sab              h'ra-reeb 

remain. 

If 

I 

of  mine 

all                 poor 

bha'ion 

ko 

ek-ek 

kauri 

dun     to     mere 

b'hah-e-O7i0 

koh 

ayk-ayk 

kaw-ree       doong          toh     may-ray 

brothers 

to 

each  one 

a  shell 

gave      then  my  pos- 

pas 

kuchh 

baki 

nahm 

bachegu. 

pahs 

kuch'h 

bah-kee 

n  a-  been? 

bach-ay  -gab. 

session  in 

some 

remainder        not 

left  will  be. 

Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 
A  very  poor  man  went  to  a  very  rich  man  and  said  to  him  : 
We  are  both  sons  of  Adam  and  Eve ;  you  are  very  rich  and  I  am 
very  poor.  Give  me  therefore  a  proper  brother's  share.  The 
rich  man  hearing  this  gave  the  poor  man  one  small  coin.  The 
poor  man  said  :  Sir,  why  do  you  not  give  me  a  proper  brother's 
share  ?  The  other  answered  :  Be  content  ray  friend.  If  I  gave 
one  small  coin  to  each  one  of  my  poor  brothers,  there  would  be 
nothing  left  for  myself. 


Ek 

ayk 
A 

US 

us 
him 


shakhs 

shah'chs 
person 


ek 

ayk 
a 


khatnavis 

h'chat-na-vees 
scribe 


ke-pas 

kay-pahs 

to 


gaya     aur 

ga-yah        awr 
went        and 


se    kaha    ki :     Meri     ek     chitthi    likh-do. 

say      ka-hah      ke  may-ree      ayk        chit-t'hee        lik'h    doh 

to       said  (that) :  My  (=me)  a         letter  write. 


Usne 

us-nay 

He 


jawab 

ja-vahb 
reply 


diya 

de-yah 
gave 


ki: 

ke 
(that)  : 


Mere 

may -ray 
My 


paun 

pall-Un0 

foot 


men 


n 


1.  When  addressing  anyone,  pronouns  and  adjectives  preceding  the 
notln  and  ending  in  a,  change  a  into  e  in  the  singular  as  well  as  in  the 
plural. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


87 


dard 

dard 

pain 
turn 

turn 
you 

hun, 


hai. 

hai 
is. 

ko 

koh 
to 


Us     shakhs     ne     kaha :       Main 

us  shah'chs         nay         ka-hah  main? 

That  person  (=the  man)        said  :  I 


kisi     jag-eh     bhejna     nahm    chahta 

kis-ee       ja-gay'h      b'haydj-nah      na-heen0  chah-h'a-tah 
any        place          sending          not  wishing 

kyun    karte    lio  ? 

kyoonj       kar-tay 


banana 

ba-hah-nah 

excuse 


to    yeh    beja 

toh     yay'h     bay-jah 
am,      then    this  improper 

Khatnavis       ne       jawab 

h'chat-na-vees  nay  ja-vahb 

The  scribe 


sach 

sach 

true 


bolte 

bohl-tay 
speaking 


Chitthl 

chit-t'hee 
letter 

mujhe 

muj-hay 


ho, 

hoh 

are, 
kisi       ke 

kis-ee  kay 

anyone 

usko    parhne 

par'h-nay 


reply 
lekin 

lay-kin 

but 


why 

diya 

de-yah 
gave 

jab 

jab 
when 


doing 
ki: 

ke 
(that)  : 

main 


us-koh 


to  read 


me  (=1)  them  by 

jata     hai,     kyun-ki 

jah-tah      hai          kjoong  ke 
going      am,        because 

dastkhat 

dast-h'chat 


nandwriting 


ko 

koh 
to 


liye      likhta 

le-yay       lik'h-tah 
for         writing 

ke     liye     zarur 

kay      le-yay       za-roor 
for    necessarily 

aur-ko'i      shakhs 

awr-koh-ee         shah'chs 
another         person 

nahm        parh-sakta 

ua-heeng  par'h-sak-tah 

not  reading  capable 


hoh 
are  ? 

Turn 

turn 
You 

ko'i 

koh-ee 
any 

hun,       to 

hoong  toh 

am,        then 
bulaya 

bul-ah-yah 

called 
mere 

may-ray 
my 

hai. 

hai 
is. 


Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 
A  certain  person  went  to  a  scribe  and  said  to  him  :  Write  a 
letter  for  me.  He  answered  that  he  had  a  pain  in  his  foot.  The 
man  said  :  I  do  not  wish  to  send  you  anywhere,  why  do  you  make 
such  a  senseless  excuse  ?  The  scribe  answered  :  What  you  say 
is  true,  but  when  I  write  a  letter  to  anyone,  I  am  always  called 
to  come  and  read  it,  because  no  one  else  can  read  my  writing. 


HUGO  ,S   HJUNDUSTAfli  ilADK  KASY. 


SIXTH    LESSON. 


THE   VERBS. 

15.  —  Hindustani  Verbs,  with  a  few  exceptions,  are  quite 
regular.  The  conjugation,  therefore,  presents  no  great  diffi- 
culty when  once  the  peculiar  constructions  are  thoroughly 
understood. 

In  the  INFINITIVE  all  verbs  end  in  na,  as  : 
bolna  (bohl-nah)  TO  SPEAK 

The  principal  parts  of  the  verb  are  :  (1)  the  STEM, 
(2)  the  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE,  and  (3)  the  PAST  PARTI- 
CIPLE. From  these  three  principal  parts,  all  the  tenses  are 
formed,  by  adding  terminations  to  the  Stem,  or  with  the 
help_pf  the  Present  and  Past  Tenses  of  the  Auxiliary  Verb 
hona,  TO  BE.  If  we  take  away  the  final  na  of  the  INFINI- 
TIVE, the  STEM  remains. 

To  form  the  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE  of  any  Verb,  add  the 
following  terminations  to  the  stem  : 

MASC.  SING.  MASC.  PLUB.  KKM.  SING.  FEM.  PLUB. 

ta  te  ti  tin 

tab  tay  tee  teen? 

To  form  the  PAST  PARTICIPLE  of  any  Verb  add  the 
following  terminations  to  the  stem  : 

MASC.  SING.  MASC.  Pi.  UK.  FEM.  SING. 

e 

ay 


a 

ah 


ee 


FEM.  PLUB. 

ifl 

ee*0 


Thus,  taking  bolna,  TO  SPEAK,  as  an  example  we  get : 
INFINITIVE  :  bolna 


STEM. 


bol 


PHKSENT  PARTICIPLE. 
MASC.  SING.     MA8C.  PLUR. 

bolte 

FEM.  PLUK. 

boltifl 


bolta 

FKM.  SI  Mr. 

bolt) 


bola        bole 

FEM.  SING.      FEM.  PLUB. 

boll         bolifl 

The  terminations  must  agree  in  Gender  ami  Number  with  the  Noun 
or  Pronoun  whu-h  is  the  Subject  of  tlto  V«»rb. 


PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

MASC.  SING.       MASC.  PLUB 


HUGOB   HIXUUaTAM    ALiDK    KAoY. 


hona,  TO  BE,  is  the  only  Auxiliary  used  in  conjugating 
Ihe  tenses  formed  of  the  Present  and  Past  Participles,  for, 
as  mentioned  on  page  24,  the  verb  TO  HAVE  is  not  used 
in  Hindustani.  Therefore,  where  in  English  TO  HAVE  (has, 
have,  had)  is  used,  the  corresponding  forms  of  TO  BE  (am,  is, 
are,  was,  were)  must  be  used  in  Hindustani. 

'  I  have  spoken  '  thus  becomes  '  I  am  spoken/  or,  to  be 
more  correct :  I  spoken  am,  main  bola  hufL  The 
Auxiliary  must  always  be  the  last  word  in  the  sentence. 

Considering  that  the  Present  and  Past  Tenses  of  hona  are  the  basis 
(or  the  conjugation  of  all  verbs,  it  is  very  important  to  make  one's  self 
thoroughly  familiar  with  these  two  tenses,  as  given  in  the  Third  Lesson. 

1. — Directly  from  the  Stem  are  formed  the  IMPERATIVE 
and  the  FUTURE.  For  conjugation  see  Lessons  8  and  10. 

2. — From  the  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE  are  formed  : 
(a)  The  PRESENT  TENSE,  as  : 

I  speak  or  I  am  speaking        main  bolta  bun  (=1  speaking  am). 

(6)  The  IMPERFECT,  as  : 

I  was  speaking  main  bolta  tha  (=1  speaking  was). 

CONJUGATION  OP  THE  ABOVE  TWO  TENSES. 

PRESENT. 

I  speak      or    I  am  speaking  main  bolta  hufi  or  bolt!  hufi 

he  speaks     „     he  is  speaking  wuh  bolta  hai 

she  speaks    .,    she  is  speaking  wuh  boltl  hai 

we  speak     „    we  are  speaking         ham  bolte  hain  or  boltl  haifi* 

J  turn  bolte  ho  or  boltl  ho 
you  speak    „    you  are  speaking        J  ap  bolte  flain  ^  ^^  haifi 

they  speak  „    they  are  speaking      ve  bolte  haifi     „  boltl  haifi 

IMPERFECT. 

I  was  speaking  main  bolta  tha  or  bolt!  thi 

he  was  speaking  wuh.  bolta  tha 

she  was  speaking  wuh  boltl  thi 

we  were  speaking  ham  bolte  the  or  boltl  thin* 

von  were  aneakim?  ( tum  bolte  the  „   boltl  thlfi 

tap  bolte  the     „  boltl  thlfi 

they  were  speaking  ve  bolte  the       „  boltl  thlfi 

•Before  haifi  or  thin  the  Fern.  Plur.  form  of  the  verb  may  drop  the  nasal  fi. 


40 


HUGO  S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


INFINITIVE. 

STEM. 

PRESENT 
PARTICIPLE. 

PAST 
PARTICIPLE. 

to  see,  dekhna 

dayk'h-nah 

dekh 

dayk'h 

dekhta 

dayk'h-tah 

dekha 

dayk'h-ah 

to  write,  likhna 

lik'h-nah 

likh 

lik'h 

likhta 

lik'h-tah 

likha 

lik'h-ah 

to  read,  parhna 

par'h-nah 

parh 

par'h 

parhta 

par'h-tah 

parha 

par'b-ah 

to  buy,  kharidna 

h'char-eed-nah 

kharid 

h'char-eed 

kharidta 

h'char-eed-tah 

kharida 

b-char-eed-ah 

to  sell,  bechna 

betch-nah 

been 

betch 

bechta 

betch  -tab 

becha 

betcb-ah 

to  hear,  sunna 

sun-nab 

sun 

sun 

sunta 

sun-tab 

suna 

sun-nab 

Only  the  Masculine  Singular  forms  of  the  Verbs  are  given.     The  other 
terminations  follow  the  ordinary  rule  for  Person,  Gender  and  Number. 


_ 

1.  main  kharidta  huii  ;  2.  ham  kharidte  the  ; 
3.  ve  nahm  kharidte  hain  ;  4.  wuh  likhta  hai  ; 
5.  kya  ap  likhte  the  ?  6.  ham  nahm  likhte  haifi  ; 

7.  kaun  bolta  hai  ?     8.  wuh  bolta  tha  ;     9.  kya 
turn  parhte  ho  ?    10.  wuh  parhti  hai  ;    11.  wuh 
parhti   thi  ;       12.  ve   bechte   hain  ;       13.  maifl 
bechta   hun  ;      14.  wuh   dekhta   hai  ;      15.  ham 
nahm    dekhte    haifi  ;     16.  wuh   sunti    hai  ;     17. 

ve  nahm  sunte  hain. 

18a. 

1.  I  buy  or  I  am  buying  ;  2.  we  were  buying  ;  3.  they 
do  not  buy  or  they  are  not  buying  ;  4.  he  writes  or  he  is 
writing  ;  5.  were  you  writing  ?  6.  we  do  not  write  or  we 
are  not  writing  ;  7.  who  speaks  or  who  is  speaking  ? 

8.  he  was  speaking  ;      9.  do  you  read  or  are  you  reading  ? 
10.  she  reads  or  she  is  reading  ;  11.  she  was  reading  ;  12.  they 
sell  or  they  are  selling  ;     13.  1  sell  or  I  am  selling  ;     14.  he 
sees  ;  15.  we  do  not  see  ;  16.  she  hears  ;  17.  they  do  not  hear. 


HUGOS   HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY.  41 

When  the  English  form  '  I  am  speaking,  I  am  reading,'  etc.,  merely 
means  '  I  speak,  I  read,'  etc.,  it  is  rendered  as  previously  explained.  But 
when  '  I  am  speaking,  reading,  writing,'  etc.,  implies  a  continuous  action, 
it  can  also  be  rendered  by  a  special  construction,  with  the  help  of  the 
?erb  raihna  (rai'h-nah),  to  remain  or  continue. 

The  STEM  only  of  the  principal  verb  is  used,  followed  by  the  forms  of 
the  PAST  PARTICIPLE  of  the  verb  raihna,  which  are  inserted  between 
the  Stem  of  the  Verb  and  the  Auxiliary.  These  forms  are  : 

MASC.  SING.          MASC.  PLUE.  FEM.  SING.          FEM.  PLUS. 

raha  rahe  rahl  rahin 

ra-hah  ra-hay  ra-hee  ra-heev 


EXAMPLES. 

PRESENT  IMPERFECT. 

I  am  speaking  main  bol  raha  hftfi 

he  is  speaking  wuh  bol  raha  hai 

we  are  speaking  ham  bol  rahe  haifi 

you  are  speaking  turn  bol  rahe  ho 

they  are  speaking  Ve  bol  rahe  haifi 

PAST  IMPERFECT. 

I  was  speaking  main  bol  raha  tha 

he  was  sneaking  wuh  bol  raha  tha 

we  were  speaking  ham  bol   rahe  the 

you  were  speaking  turn  bol  rahe  the 

they  were  speaking  ve  bol  rahe  the 

19_1 

1.  main  park  raha  hun ;  2.  ham  likh  rahe 
hain ;  3.  ve  likh  rahin  thin ;  4.  wuh  kharid 
raha  hai ;  5.  wuh  akhbar  parh  rahl  thi ;  6. 
ap  chitthi  likh  rahe  the ;  7.  main  ghora  been 
raha  tha. 

19a. 

1.  I  am  reading  ;  2.  we  are  writing  ;  3.  they  were 
writing  ;  4.  he  is  buying  ;  5.  she  was  reading  the 
newspaper  ;  6.  you  were  writing  a  letter  ;  7.  I  was 

selling  a  horse. 
H.S. — 2* 


42  HUGO'S   HIiNDUHTANI    MADE    KA8T. 


SEVENTH    LESSON. 


16. — From  the  PAST  PARTICIPLE  are  formed  : 

1.  The  PAST  TENSE  as  :  I  spoke. 

2.  The  PERFECT  as :  I  have  spoken. 

3.  The  PLUPERFECT  as  :  I  had  spoken. 

These  tenses  can  be  formed  in  two  ways,  namely,  with 
or  without  the  introduction  of  the  Preposition  n0  (nay)  BY. 

As  a  general  rule  we  may  accept  that  (1)  Verbs  which 
have  or  can  have  a  Direct  Object  are  conjugated  with  ne, 
and  (2)  Verbs  which  have  no  Object  or  no  Direct  Object 
are  conjugated  without  ne. 

No  definite  rules,  however,  can  be  given.  With  some  verb*  the  use 
of  ne  is  optional. 

EXAMPLES. 

(1)  bechna  (baycfa.nah)  TO  SELL 
I  sold  main,  ne  becha* 

1  hare  sold  maifi  ne  beoh&  hai 

I  bad  sold  main  ne  beoh&  tha 

(2)  hansna  (han^nato  TO  LAUGH 

I  laughed  main  hafisa* 

I  have  laughed  main  hansa  hufi 

I  had  laughed  main  hansa  tha 

*  The  simple  Past  Tense  is  always  the  same  as  the  Past  Participle. 

The  construction  with  H6  is  somewhat  complicated  and 
requires  careful  study.  The  following  rules  will  be  of 

assistance. 

RULES  FOR  THE  USE  OF  116  IN  FORMING  THE 
TENSES  OF  THE  PAST   PARTICIPLE. 

1. — ne  immediately  follows  the  SUBJECT  of  the  sentence. 
The  Verb  is  in  the  Third  Person  SINGULAR,  if  there  is 
no  Object  mentioned,  or  if  the  Object  (Singular  or 
Plural)  is  followed  by  ko  (koh)  TO.     Examples  : 
I  have  sold  main  ne  becha  hai 

I  have  sold  a  hone  main  ne  ghoret  ko  becha  hai 

I  have  sold  horses  maifi  ne  ghoron  ko  becha  hai 

t  ft  before  a  Preposition  changes  into  e. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE  EAST.  48 

2. — If  there  is  an  Object,  but  NOT  followed  by  ko,  the 
Gender  and  Number  of  the  Verb  are  governed  by  the 
OBJECT.  Examples  : 

I  have  sold  the  horse  main  ne  ghora  becha  hai 

I  have  sold  the  horses  main  ne  ghore  beche  hain 

I  have  sold  the  book  main  ne  kitab  bechi  hai 

I  have  sold  the  books  main  ne  kitaben  bechi  hain 

It  will  be  seen  that  in  this  construction,  the  OBJECT  of  the  English 
phrase  becomes  (for  grammatical  purposes)  the  SUBJECT  of  the  Hindu* 
«taui  phrase,  thus : 

I  have  sold  the  horse  =  by  me  the  horse  is  sold 
I  have  sold  the  books  =  by  me  the  books  are  sold 


3.  —  Bef  ore  ne  the  Pronouns  yell  and  WTlh  (Singular)  become 
is  (is)  and  US  (us)  respectively,  in  the  same  way  the 
Pronouns  ve,  yeh  and  wuh  (Plural)  before  ne,  be- 
come inhon  (in-honf)  and  unhon  (un- 


NOTE.—  The  construction  with  NE  applies  only  to  the 
Tenses  formed  from  the  Past  Participle.  It  does  not  affect 
the  Tenses  formed  from  the  Present  Participle. 

20. 

1.  main  ne  ek  kitab  kharidi  hai  ;  2.  us  ne 
kitaben  kharidi  hain  ;  3.  ham  ne  yeh  kitaben 
kharidi  thin  ;  4.  unhon  ne  chitthian  likhin  ; 
5.  ham  ne  chitthian  likhi  thifi  ;  6.  kya  turn  ne 
yeh  kitab  parhi  ?  7.  kya  turn  ne  yeh  kitab  parhi 
hai  ?  8.  unhon  ne  ve  kitaben  nahin  parhi  thin  ; 

9.  ham  ne  apke  doston  ko  nahin  dekha  hain  ; 

10.  main  ne  turn  ko  nahin  dekha. 

20a. 

1.  1  have  bought  a  book  ;  2.  he  has  bought  books  ; 
3.  we  had  bought  these  books  ;  4.  they  wrote  letters  ; 
5.  we  had  written  the  letters  ;  6.  did  you  read  (=read  you) 
this  book  ?  7.  have  you  read  this  book  ?  8.  they  had  not 
read  those  books  ;  9.  we  have  not  seen  your  friends  : 
10.  I  did  not  see  you  (=*saw  you  not). 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE    EAST. 


Some  Verbs  which  do  not  take  ne. 


to  meet    milna 

mil-nab 

to  sleep    sona 

so-nah 

to  weep   rona 

roh-nah 

to  laugh  hansna 


PAST  PARTICIPLE    mila 

mil-ah 

soya* 

sob-ah 

roya* 

roh-ah 

hansa 


*  Irregular  formations  of  the  Past  Participle.     See  aiso  Lessons  8  and  9. 

21. 

1.  main  mila,  wuh  mila  hai ;  2.  ham  mile 
hain,  ve  mile  the ;  3.  wuh  ro'i,  wuh  ro'i  hai, 
turn  nahm  ro'e  the ;  4.  wuh  hansa,  ham  nahm 
hanse  hain,  main  hansa  tha ;  5.  kya  turn  so'e  ? 
ham  so'e  hain,  wuh  nahm  soya  tha. 

21a. 

1.  I  met,  he  has  met ;  2.  we  have  met,  they  had  met ; 
3.  she  wept,  she  has  wept,  you  had  not  wept ;  4.  he 
laughed,  we  have  not  laughed,  I  had  laughed  ;  5.  did 
you  sleep  (=slept  you)  ?  we  have  slept,  he  had  not  slept. 

THE    MONTHS. 


January  Janvari 

jan-va-ree 

February  Farvari 

far'va-ree 

March  March 

mahrch 

April  Aprail 

a-prail 

Ma'I 


May 
June 


joon 


Jun 


July  Jula'i 

ju-lah-ee 

August  Agast 

a-gast 

September       Sitambar 

se-tam-bar 

October  Actubar 

ac-too-bar 
November        NavanibaP 

na-vam-bar 

December         Disambar 
dis-am-bar 


HUGO  S  HINDUSTANI  MADE  EASY. 


45 


PREPOSITIONS, 

or,  more  correctly,  Postpositions,  as  their  position  in  a  sen- 
tence is  generally  AFTER  the  Object,  not  before  it,  as  in 
English. 


TO,  AT 

ko 

(    liye 

koh 

FOR               \  lee-yay 

WITH 

sath 

1    vaste 

saht'h 

vahs-tay 

FROM 

se 

AFTER            bad 

say 

bahd 

AT,  ON 

par 

par 

BETWEEN    (ke)  darmyan 

(kay)  dann-yahn 

IN 

men 

BEHIND           pichhe 

maywp 

peech-hay 

BY 

ne,  se 

UNDER            niche 

nay,  say 

nee-chay 

OF 

ka,  ke,  ki 

THROUGH        men  se 

kah,  kay,  kee 

mayn0  say 

Final  a  before  a  Preposition  becomes  e,  regardless  of  Gender  or  Number. 

Before  all  Prepositions  yeh  and  wuh  (Singular)  become  is  and    US 

respectively.      Before  all  Prepositions  (except  ne),  ve,  yeh  and  wuh 

(Plural)  become  in  and  un  (see  Rule  3  on  '  the  use  of  ne'). 

22. 

1.  ve  shaihar  men  ham  ;  2.  ham  apke  dostofi 
ke  sath  the  ;  3.  larka  darvaze  par  hai ;  4.  kitab 
kursi  ke  niche  hai ;  5.  bachche  ghar  ke  pfchhe 
hain ;  6.  mere  liye  yeh  kitab  hai ;  7.  g-oron  aur 
Hindustanion  ke  darmyan  achchha  dostana*  hai. 

*  dostana  (dohs-tah-nah),  friendliness. 

22a. 

1.  they  are  in  tne  town  ;  2.  we  were  with  your  frienus  ; 
3.  the  boy  is  at  the  door  ;  4.  the  book  is  under  the  chair ; 
5.  the  children  are  behind  the  house  ;  6.  this  book  is  for 
me  ;  7.  between  the  white  people  and  the  Indians  there  is 
good  fellowship  (=friei.dliness). 


46 


HUOO  B   HIADU8TAN1   MADE   KAST. 


CONVERSATIONAL    PHRASES. 


What  o'clock  (' 

it? 

It  is  one  o'clock. 
It  is  half  past  two. 
It    is    ten    minutes   to 

three. 
Twenty    minutes    past 

four. 

It  does  not  matter. 
Is  it  all  right  ? 
Pardon  me. 
You  are  right. 
I  am  wrong. 
Come  this  way. 

I   will  show  you  the 


time)  is    1.  Kya  baja  hai  ? 


way. 


2.  Ek  baja  hai. 

3.  Dha*!  baje  hain. 

4.  Tin  bajne1  mefi  das  xni- 

nat  hain. 

5.  Char  baj-kar  bis  minat 

hain. 

6.  Kuchh  bat  nahin. 

7.  Kya  yeh  thlk  hai  ? 

8.  Muaf  kijiye. 

9.  Turn  thik  ho. 

10.  Main  ghalat  nun. 

11.  Is  raste  se  a*o,  or  idhar 

ko  a'o. 

12.  Main  tum_ko  rasta  dikh- 

ladungra. 


1  before  men  or  any  other  Preposition  final  a  changes  into  e. 
Imitated  Pronunciation  of  the  above  phrases. 


1  kyah  ba-jah  hai  ? 

2  ayk  ba-jah  hai  ? 

3  d'hah-ee  ba-jay 

4  teen  baj-nay  may*?  das  me-nat 


5  chahr  baj-kar  bees  me-nat  h&jn 

6  kuch'h  baht  na-hee«a 

7  kyah  yay'h  t'heek  hai  ? 


8  mu-ahf  kee-je-yay 

9  turn  t'heek  hoh 

10  main?  h'ra-lat  hoon? 

11  is  rahs-tay  say  ah-oh,  or  id-har 

koh  ah-oh 

12  main?    turn  koh  rahs-tah  dik'h- 

lah-doonj-gah 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  phrases. 

The  literal  translation  of  the  phrases  1  to  5  is  :  1  what  struck  is  ? 
2  one  struck  is  ;  8  two  and  a  half  struck  are  ;  4  three  to  strike  in  ten 
minutes  are  ;  5  four  struck  is  twenty  minutes. 

8  Polite  Imperative  adds  iye  or  jiye  to  the  stem  of  the  verb  ;  literally 
this  phrase  would  read  :  Pardon  please  do  ;  12  unga  after  the  stem  at 
the  verb  indicates  the  Future  Tense  (shall  or  will). 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  HADE  EASY.  47 

EASY    READING, 

with  Imitated  Pronunciation,  Literal  Translation  and 
Correct  English  Rendering. 

Ek    andheri    rat    mefi    ek    andha    admi    apne 

ayk    a»i»d-hay-ree      raht      m&jng      ayk      and-hah    ahd-mee       ap-nay 
One        dark        night     in        a        blind         man  his 

hath    mefL     ek     chiragli     aur     apne1     kandhe 

babt'h      may«<7        ayk        chir-ah'r  awr         ap-nay  kand-hay 

hand          in          a  lamp  and        his  shoulder 

par       ek       bartan        le-kar,        mandi       men 

par  ayk  bar-tan  lay-kar  man-dee          mayn^ 

on  a  jar  having-taken,     market  in 

ja-raha     tha.       Kisi     ne     usko     kaha :       Ai 

jah-rah-hah      t'hah  k  s-see      nay         us-koh         ka-hah  ai 

going  was.        Someone  him  to  said  :  Oh 

bewakuf !    ten    ankhon,    men     din     aur     rat 

bayv-a-koof        tay-rec      ahng-k'hong      mayn?         din  awr        raht 

fool !  thine        eyes,  in          day        and    night 

yaksafi     hain,     tere     liye     chiragh     ka     kya 

yak-sabiv          hai»0        tay-ray      le-yay         chir-ab  r         kah          kyab 
alike  are,         thee        for           lamp  of        what 

fa'ida     hai  ?          Andhe     ne     hans-kar    jawab 

fab-ee-dab     hai  and-bay         nay          ban^s-kar  ja-vahb 

benefit       is  ?         The  blind  man  laugh  doing          reply 

diya  :      Ai,    ala     khardimagh !    kya     tu     yeh 

de-yab  ay      ab-lab        b'cbar-de-mab'r  kyab        too       yay'h 

gave :          Oh,    great      donkey-brain  !         what    thou        it 

khiyal-karta     hai     ki     chiragh     mere     f^'ide 

b'cbe-yahl-kar-tab        hai  ke         chir-ah'r          may-ray  £ah-ee-day 

imagining  art        that     the  lamp        my  benefit 

1  for  the  use  of  apne,  see  Lesson  13. 

NOTE. — In  t-his  exercise  the  familiar  form  of  the  second  person  has 
been  used  :  for  full  forms  of  this  pronoun,  refer  to  Index. 


HUGO  8   HINDUSTANI   MADK   EASY. 


ke    liye    hai  ? 

kay      le-yay      hai 

Nahin, 

na-heen<r 

nahin 

,    yeh 

7      yay'h 

bilkul-hi 

bil-kul-hee 

for 

is? 

No, 

no, 

it 

entirely 

tere 

vaste 

hai, 

ta 

ki 

tu 

andhere 

tay-ray 

vabs-tay 

hai 

tab 

ke 

too 

aK0d-hay-ray 

thee 

for 

is, 

SO 

that 

thou 

darkness 

men 

mera 

bartan 

na 

tor 

de. 

mayw 

may-rah 

bar-tan 

nab 

tohr 

day 

in 

my 

jar 

not 

break 

do. 

Correct  English  .i>«nd-ering  of  the  above. 
One  dark  night,  a  blind  mau  with  a  lamp  in  his  hand  and  a 
jar  on  his  shoulder  was  going  to  the  market.  Someone  said  to 
him  :  Thou  fool  1  day  and  night  are  alike  to  thine  eyes,  of  what 
benefit  is  a  lamp  to  thee  ?  The  blind  mail  laughingly  answered  : 
Oh,  thou  blockhead  I  dost  thou  imagine  that  the  lamp  is  for 
my  benefit  ?  No,  no,  it  is  entirely  for  thee,  so  that  in  the  dark- 
ness thou  mayest  not  break  my  jar. 


Dehli      shaihar      ki      ek-hi      g*ali      men      do 

day'h-lee         sbai-har  kee        ayk-hee        ga-lee        may»v         dob 

Delhi  town  of         same        street        in          two 

shakhs     raihte     the.       Un     men     ek     kanjus 

ehah'chs          rai'h-tay        t'hay  un        m&yng        ayk        kan-joos 

persons         living         were.       Them   among    one        a  miser 

aur    dusra    amir    tha.        Ve       ek-dusre-ke-pas 

awr       doos-rah     a-meer       t'hah  vay  ayk   doos-ray-kay-pahs 

and  the  other  a  rich  man  was.        They        one  another  with 

aya-jaya    karte    the,    aur    un    men     apas-mefi 

ab-yah-jab-yah  kar-tay      t'hay,     awr         un         in&jng       ah-pas   mayn? 
come  and  go    used  to    were,  and    them   among        mutually 

dostana  bhi    tha.       Ek    dafa  kanjus  ne   amir 

dohs-tah-nah   b'hee    t'hab          ayk      da-fab     kan-joos       nay      a-meer 
friendliness  also      was.  Once          the  miser        rich  man 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE  EASY. 


se    kaha    ki  :    Pyare  dost, 

say      ka-hah        ke         p'yah-ray  dohst 

to      said    (that)  :      Dear  friend, 

par-des       ko     jata  hun. 

par-days  koh        jah-tah  boon? 

foreign  country  to     going  am. 

ang-uthi     chahta 

any-goo-t'hee      chah'h-tah 
ring:  wanting 


main 

I 

Main 

inning 
I 


dur 

door 
distant 


him, 

hoong 
am, 


ta-ki 

tah-ke 
so-  that 


use 

u-say 
it 


main 

main? 
I 


turn 

turn 
you 


ko 

koh 
to 


yad-karta 

yahd-kar-tah 
remembering 


rahun. 


continue. 


daraz 

da-rabz 
very 

tumhari 

tum-hah-ree 
your 

dekh-kar, 

dayk'h-kar 
seeing-do, 

Amir 

a-meer 
The  rich  man 


ne 

nay 

ko 

koh 
at 

Asal 

as-al 
True 


jawab 

ja-vahb 
reply 


diya    ki  : 

de-yah      ke 
gave  (that)  : 


Turn    apm    nangri 

turn        ap-nee    nan^-guee 
You  your  (own)    bare 


dekh-kar 

dayk'h-kar 
seeing 

dosti 

dohs-tee 
friendship 


mujhe 

muj-hay 
me 

ko 

koh 
to 


angruthi     vaghaira     ki 

an0-goo-t'hee      vab'r-ai-rah         kee 
rings  and-such-like      of 


yad-kar 

yahd-kar 
remember 

yaddasht 

yahd-dahsht 
remembrance 

zarurat 

za-roo-rat 
need 


sakte 

sak-tay 
can 

ke 

kay 
of 

nahm 

na-hee«<r 
not 


ungli 

unj-giee 
finger 

ho. 

hob 
be. 

liye 

le-yay 

for 
hai. 

hai 

is. 


Correct  English  rendering-  of  the  above. 
In  a  street  in  the  town  of  Delhi,  lived  two  persons.  The  one 
was  a  miser  and  the  other  a  rich  man.  They  used  to  visit  one 
another  and  were  on  friendly  terms.  One  day  the  miser  said  to 
the  rich  man  :  Dear  friend,  I  am  going  to  a  far  distant  country. 
I  want  your  ring,  so  that  seeing  it,  I  may  constantly  remember 
you.  The  rich  man  answered  :  When  you  see  your  bare  finger, 
it  will  remind  you  of  me.  True  friendship  does  not  need  rings 
and  such  like  for  remembrance. 


50 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 


EIGHTH    LESSON. 


17. — PRONOUNS  for  the  ACCUSATIVE  (Object). 

YOU     tumko  or  tumhen 

tuin-koh  tum-hayn? 

(ordinary  and  intimate  form) 

YOU       apkO  (ahp-koh) 
(respectful  and  polite  form) 

THEM    unko  or  unhen 

(distant)    un-koh         un-hayn? 

THEM    inko   „  inhen 

in-koh  in-bayn«r 

(on  the  spot) 

*  ko  (BY)  is  usually  joined  to  the  pronoun,  and  occasionally  to  the 
noun,  which  it  follows.  In  Urdu,  the  joined  and  the  separated  forms  are 
used  indifferently.  In  Hindi,  the  practice  is,  at  present,  a  matter  of  con- 
troversy. The  same  applies  to  other  particles  and  prepositions.  In  this 
text-book,  these  are  usually  written  as  separate  words. 

f  The  alternative  forms  of  the  pronouns  here  given  are  both  in  general 
use.  Sometimes  the  one  is  more  idiomatic  than  the  other. 


MB    mujhko* 

mudj'h-koh 

or  mujhet 

mudj-Liay 

HIMflr)USko 
HER      )  ns-koh 
(distant) 

„  use 

us-ay 

HlMorUsko 
HER       )  is-koh 
(on  the  spot) 

„  ise 

is-ay 

us     hamko 

ham-koh 

„  hamen 

haui-aynff 

VERBS  (continued). 

18. — When  the  STEM  ends  in  a  long  vowel,  y  is  inserted 
before  the  Termination  of  the  PAST  PARTICIPLE,  as  in  the 
following  verbs  : 


INFINITIVE. 

STEM. 

PRESENT 
PARTICIPLE. 

PAST 

PARTICIPLE. 

to  bring,  lana 

lah-uah 

la 

lah 

lata 

lull-tali 

laya 

lah-yah 

to  come,  ana 

ah-uah 

a 

ah 

ata 

ah-tah 

aya 

ah-yah 

to  eat,  khana 

k'hah-nah 

kha 

k'hah 

khata 

k'haii-tah 

khaya 

k'hah-yab 

to  drink,  pina* 
pee-nah 

PI 

pee 

pita 

pee-tah 

piya 

pee-yah 

to  prepare,  banana 

(as  food)        ba-uah-iiah 

bana 

ba-iiah 

banata 

ba-nah-tah 

banaya 

ba-uuh-yah 

*  pina  is  also  used  for  '  to  smoke '  tobacco.    Literally  therefore, 
to  drink  tobacco. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST.  51 

23. 

1.  main  ata  hun,  ve  aye,  wuh  aya  hai ; 
2.  ve  nahm  ate  hain,  kya  ap  ate  hain  ?  3.  yeh 
sharab*  pTjiye,  pan!  na  pijiye ;  4.  mere  liye 
kuchh  roti  lao,  wuh  yell  laya  hai ;  5.  yeh  khatt 
kaun  laya  hai  ?  6.  us  ne  ek  khat  likha  hai ; 

7.  ise  kha'iye,  ise  mat  kha'o  ;    8.  khana  ban  graya 
hai ;     9.  kya  turn   ne  khana  banaya    hai  ?    10. 
main  banata  (or  bana  raha;  hun. 

*  sharab  (shar-ahb),  wine.  fkhat  (h'chat)  =letter. 

NOTE. — For  formation  of  the  IMPERATIVE,  see  next  page  (rule 

23a. 

1.  I  am  coming,  they  came,  he  has  come  ;  2.  they  are 
not  coming,  are  you  coming  ?  3.  please  drink  this  wine, 
do  not  drink  water  ;  4.  bring  me  some  bread,  he  has 
brought  it ;  5.  who  has  brought  this  letter  ?  6.  he  has 
written  a  letter  ;  7.  please  eat  this,  do  not  eat  that  ; 

8.  the  food  (dinner)  is  prepared  (cooked)  ;     9.  have  you 
prepared  the  food  ?     10.  I  am  preparing  (it). 

24. 

1.  main  ne  inko  dekha ;  2.  kya  ap  ne  isko 
dekha  hai  ?  3.  ap  unko  kahan  mile  ?  4.  main 
ne  unko  aksar*  dekha  hai ;  5.  kya  turn  ne  mujhko 
suna  ?  6.  ham  ne  unko  chitthian  likhi  hain ; 
7.  kya  turn  ne  usko  chitthi  likhi  hai  ?  8.  ham- 

kO  khat  likhO.  *  aksar  (ak-sar),  often. 

24a. 

L  I  saw  them  ;  2.  have  you  seen  her  or  him  ?  3. 
where  did  you  meet  them  ?  4.  I  have  often  seen  them  ; 
5.  did  you  hear  me  ?  6.  we  have  written  letters  to  them  ; 
7.  have  you  written  a  letter  to  him  or  her  ?  8.  write  us  a 
letter. 


52  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE    EAST. 


tobacco        tambaku,  f. 


tam-bah-koo 


Indian  pipe  hukka,  m. 


huk-kah 


Indian  cigar      churat,  f. 


chu-rat 


cigarette      Sigrat,  f. 


part  hissa.  m. 

his-sah 

European      firangl 

fe-ra»0-guee 

to  be  grown  boya  jana 

or  sown       boh-yah  jah-nab 

to  use       istimal  karna 

is-ti-mal  kar-nah 


si-grat 

people  log 

lohg 

25. 

1.  Tambaku  Hindustan  ke  kuchh  hisson  men 
boi  jati  hai.  2.  Ohurat  am  taur  par  Barmi  log 
istimal  karte  hain.  3.  Firangi  log  hukke  ko 
pasand*  nahm  karte.  4.  Shaihron  men  bahut 
log  sigrat  pite  hain. 

*  pasand  (pa-sand)  liked. 

25a. 

1.  Tobacco  is  grown  in  some  parts  of  India.  2.  The 
cheroot  is  generally  smoked  (=used)  by  the  people  of 
Burma.  3.  Europeans  do  not  like  the  '  hukka '  (Indian  pipe). 
4.  In  the  towns  many  people  smoke  cigarettes. 


THE    IMPERATIVE. 

19. — The  ordinary  IMPERATIVE  is  formed  by  adding 
O  to  the  Stem  of  the  Verb,  as  : 

write  !  likho  !        read  I  parho  I         bring  !  lao  !  (or  la'o  I) 
come  1  ao  !  (or  a'o  !) 

The  apostrophe  between  the  final  vowel  of  the  Stem  and  the  o  of  the 
Imperative,  is  optional.     The  apostrophe  serves  to  make  the  pronunciation 


The  RESPECTFUL  or  POLITE  IMPERATIVE  is  formed  by 
adding  iye  (e-yay)  '  please,'  to  the  Stem  of  the  Verb,  as  : 
aiye  !  please  come  '  khaiye  !  please  eat  1 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST.  53 

Note  the  slight  variations  in  the  spelling  of  the  Polite 
Imperative,  namely  : 

(A)  If  the  Stem  ends  in  a  or  o,  or  any  consonant,  add  iye  to  the 

St«m,  as  in  :     aiye  !  please  come  ! 

(B)  If  the  Stem  ends  in  1  add  jiye,  as  in  : 

pljiye  !    please  smoke  I 

(C)  If  the  Stem  ends  in  e  change  this  final  e  into  I  and  add  jiye. 

as  in  :  lena,  to  take  ;  Stem,  le  ; 

Polite  Imperative  :  lijiye  !    please  take  1 

In  an  IMPERATIVE  phrase,  NOT  is  sometimes  rendered 
by  mat  (mat),  instead  of  by  na  or  nahin,  thus  : 

do  not  come     mat  a'o  please  do  not  cume   mat  aiye 

do  not  bring  it  yeh  mat  la'o    please  do  not  drink  this  yell  mat  pljiye 

do  not  go  to  sleep  mat  so'o 
The  modern  tendency  is  to  discard  the  use  of  mat. 

The  INFINITIVE  often  serves  the  purpose  of  the  IM- 
PERATIVE, thus  : 

do  not  come    mat  ana  please  come    ana 

do  not  bring  it  yeh  mat  lana  please  bring  it  yeh  lana 

Steins  ending  in  e  have,  besides  the  ordinary  Imperative, 
an  irregular  one, formed  by  dropping  the  6  before  O.  The 
latter  form  is  more  idiomatic. 

What  did  you  say  ?         1.    Ap  ne  kya  kaha? 
I  did  not  understand.      2.    Main  nahin  samjha. 
This  is  very  easy.  3.    Yeh  bahut  asan  hai. 

That  is  very  difficult.         4.     Wllh      bahut     mushkil 

hai. 

Is  it  possible  ?  5.    Kya  yeh  mumkin  hai  ? 

No,  it  is  impossible.         6.    Nahin,  yeh    namumkin 

hai. 

Imitated  Pronunciation.— 1  ahp  nay  kyah  ka-hah  ?  2  main?  na- 
hee*<r  sam-j'hah  ;  3  yay'h  bu-hut  ah-sahn  hai  ;  4  vo'h  ba-hut  mush-kil 
hai  o  kyah  yay'h  mum- kin  hai  ?  6  na-heen»  yay'h  nah- mum-kin  hai. 


54 


HUGOS   HINDUSTANI   MADE   KASY. 


CONVERSATIONAL    PHRASES. 


I  am  going  out. 
Bring  my  clothes. 
Bring  my  shoes. 
Brush  my  hat  and  coat. 
This  is  good  news. 
It  is  late,  I  must  go. 

Whose  fault  is  it  ? 
It  was  not  his  fault. 
Shut  the  door. 
Don't  forget. 
Put  the  rupees  in  the 

bag. 

You  have  leave  to  go. 
Wake  me  early. 
It     is     dark    in    this 

room. 

Light  a  candle. 
There  is  no  oil  in  the 

lamp. 


1.  Main  bahar  ja  raha  hun. 

2.  Mere  kagre  la'o. 

3.  Mere  jute  la'o.  [ro. 

4.  Mera  top  aur  kot  saf  ka- 

5.  Yeli  achchhi  khabar  hai. 

6.  Der  _ho  ga'i,  mujhe  jana 

chahiye. 

7.  Kiska  kasur  hai  ? 

8.  Uska  kasur  nahifi.  tha. 

9.  Darvaza  band  karo. 

10.  MatbhiUna. 

11.  Rupaye  thaili  men  rak- 

ho. 

12.  Turn  ja  sakte  ho. 

13.  Mujhe  jaldi  jagana. 

14.  Is  kamre  men  andhera 

hai. 

15.  BattijaliPo. 

16.  Lamp  (or  chiragJi)  mefl 

tel  nahifl  hai. 


Imitated  Pronunciation 

1  main?  bah-har  jah  ra-hah  boon? 

2  may-ray  kap-ray  lah-oh 

3  may-ray  joo-tay  lah-oh 

4  may-rah  tohp  awr  koht  sahf  ka-roh 
6  yay'h  ach-ch'hee  h'cha-bar  hai 

6  dayr  hob  ga'ee,  mudj-hay  jah-nah 

7  kis-kah  ka-soor  hai  ?  [chah-he-yay 

8  uB-kah  ka-soor  na-heen<;  t'hab 


of  the  above  Phrases. 
9  dar-vah-sah  band  ka-roh 

10  mat  b'hool-nah 

11  ru-pa-yay   t'hai-lee    m&yng    rak- 

12  turn  jah  sak-tay  hoh  [k'hoh 

13  mudj-hay  jal-dee  ja-gah-nah 

14  is  kam-ray  may»v  an^d-hay-rah  hai 

15  bat-tee  ja-lah-oh  [been?  hai 

16  lamp  (che-rah'r)  mayn?  tayl   na- 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  Phrases. 

4  literally,  my  hat  and  coat  clean  do ;    6  literally,  delay  has  become , 
14  literally,  this  room  in  darkness  is. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EAST. 


55 


Who  lives  here  ? 
Is  the  master  at  home  ? 
Come  in.      Sit  down. 
Please  sit  down. 
How  do  you  do  ? 
Is  anyone  there  ? 
Go  and  see  who  it  is. 
Have  the  bearers  (car- 
riers) come  ? 
They  are  all  here. 
This  is  a  hot  climate. 
I  do  not  like  it. 

There    are   many   flies 

here. 

Flies  are  a  nuisance. 
It  is  a  fine  day. 
It  was  too  hot  yesterday. 
Tell  me  what  the  time 

is. 

Your  watch  is  fast. 
His  watch  is  slow. 
Put  my  watch  on  the 

table. 


1.  Yahan  kaun  rahta  hai  ? 

2.  Kya  malik  ghar  par  hal  ? 

3.  A'o.     Baitho. 

4.  Baithjaiye. 

5.  Turn  kaise  ho  ? 

6.  Kya  vahan  koi  hai  ? 

7.  Ja'o,  dekho  wuh   kaun 

hai. 

8.  Kya  baire  a  graye  haifi  ? 

9.  Wuh  sab  yahan  hain. 

10.  Yeh  grarm  abohava  hai. 

11.  Main  ise  pasand  nahin 

karta. 

12.  Yahanbahutmakkhiyan 

hain.  [hain. 

13.  Makkhiyan  ban  kharab 

14.  Yeh  achchha  din  hai. 

15.  Kal  bar!  garmi  thi. 

16.  Mujhe  bata'o  vakt  kya 

hai._ 

17.  Tumhari  g-hari  tez  hai. 

18.  Uski  grhari  sust  hai. 

19.  Men  ghari  mez  par  rak- 

ho. 


Imitated  Pronunciation 

1  ya-hahnj  kawn  ra'h-tah  hai  ? 

2  kyab  mah-lik  g'har  par  hai  ? 

3  ah-oh,  bai-t'hoh 

4  bait'h  jah-e-yay 
6  turn  kai-say  boh  ? 

6  kyah  va-hab«p  koh-ee  hai  1 

7  jah-oh,  dek-hoh  vo'h  kawn  hai 

8  kyuli  bai-ray  ab  ga-yay  hayn»  ? 

9  vo'h  sab  ya-habny  hayn0 

10  yay'h  garm  a-bo-ha-vah  hai 


of  the  above  Phrases. 

1 1  main?  is-ay  pa-sand  na-hee«r  kar- 

tab  [bayv 

12  ya-habn0  ba-hut  mak-k'he-yahnii 

13  mah-k'he-yah»v  ba-ree  h'chah-rab 

14  yay'h  ach-ch'hah  din  hai    [hayn$ 

15  kal  ba-ree  gar-mee  t'hee 

16  mudj-hay  ba-tah-oh  vakt  kyah  bai 

17  tum-hah-ree  g'ha-ree  tayz  hai 

18  us-kee  g'ha-ree  sust  hai       [k'hoh 

19  may-ree  g'ha-ree  mayz  par  rak- 


56 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EAST. 


EASY    READING, 

with  Imitated  Pronunciation,  Literal  Translation  and 
correct  English  Rendering. 


Ek 

admi 

ke-pas 

ek 

bara 

vafadar 

nau- 

ayk 

ahd-mee 

kay-pahs 

ayk 

ba-rab 

va-fah-dahr 

naw- 

A 

man    in 

possess!  oil  of 

a 

very 

faithful 

ser- 

kar    tha.       Wuh    naukar    bachpan    se     malik 

kar         t'hah  vo'h          naw-kar         batch-pan        say         mah-lik 

vant    was.  That      servant       childhood    from      master 


ki    dil-o-jan    se 

kee        dil  o  jahn       say 
of  heart-and-soul  from 


khidmat 

h'chid-mat 

service 


karta 

kar-tah 
doing 


tha. 

t'hah 
was. 


har-vakt 

har-vakt 
all  the  time 


malik 

mah-lik 
master 


ke 

kay 
of 


araxn 

ah-rahm 
comfort 


khiyal    raihta    tha. 

h'chi-yahl      rai'h-tah      t'hah 
thoughts        occupied. 


aziz 

a-zeez 
deai- 
US 
as 
him 


samajhta 

sa-madj'h-tah 

considering 


tha. 

t'hah 
was. 


Malik 

mah-lik 

The  master 
Bad 

bad 
111 


aur 

awr 

and 

bill 

b'hee 
also 


p'hah-e-day 
ease 


Usko 

us-koh 
Him  to 


ka 

kah 
Of 


usko    bahut 

us-koh          ba-hut 
him  very 


kismati 

kis-ma-tee 
luck 


se,     jab 

say          jab 
by,    when 


par    burhapa    aya,     to 

par       bur-hah-pah     ah-yah       toh 

on        old  age        came,    then 


fark    hone 

fark         hoh-nay 
difference  to  be 


laga, 

la  gah 
began, 


yahan  tak 

ya-hahn<F-tak 
in-so-far 


USkl 

us-kee 
his 

ki 

ke 
that 


nigali 

ne-ga'h 
sight 

wuh 

vo'h 

he 


andha 

and-hah 
blind 


ho  gaya. 

boh  ga-yah 

became. 


Malik 

mah-lik 

The  master 


ko 

koh 
to 


ab 

ab 
now 


wuh 

vo'h 

he 


men 

maynj 
in 

bilkul 

bil-kul 
totally 

bura 

bur-ah 

bad 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST.  57 

malum    hone  lagra  us  ne  usko    ghar    se    bahar 

mah-loom     hob-nay     la-gah   us    nay     us-koh         g'har      say        bah-hai 
seeming       to  be      began       be      him        house  from    outside 

nikal   diya.      Is     saluk     par,     wuh      bechara 

ne-kahl  de-yah  is        sa-lock  par  vo'h          betch-ah-rah 

turned.  This   treatment       on,        that  helpless 

naukar   ro  para  aur   ansu  uski  ankhon 

naw-kar  roh-pah-rah          awr         ahn0-soo      us-kee         ah«0k-hon{ 

servant     weeping  burst-out    and        tears        his  eyes 

se     girne     lagre.       Rote  hue     us  ne      kaha  : 

say      guir-nay         la-gay  roh-tay  hu-ay          us-nay  ka-hah 

from     to  fall       began.  Weeping  he  said : 

Kya !     yehi      meri    vafadari     ka    inam    hai  ? 

kyah  yay-hee       may-ree     va-fah-dah-ree     kah      in-ahra         hai 

What  1       this  my        faithfulness    of     reward        is  ? 

Ag-ar    apko   zara  bhi    khuda    ka    dar    hota,  to 

a-gar        ahp-koh      za-rah  b'hee     h'cliud-ah      kah      dar      hoh-tah     toh 

If  you       just  a  little        God        of      fear      had,  then 

mere         sath     yen      saluk      na      karte. 

may-ray  saht'h         yay'h          sa-look  na          kar-tay 

my  (=me)  (with)       this      treatment      not        done. 


Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 
A  man  had  a  very  faithful  servant.  From  his  childhood  this 
servant  had  served  his  master  with  heart  and  soul.  The  comfort 
and  ease  of  his  master  always  occupied  his  thoughts.  The 
master  also  valued  him  highly.  By  ill  luck,  when  the  servant 
was  getting  old,  his  sight  began  to  fail.  At  last  he  became 
totally  blind  and  could  do  no  more  work.  He  now  became  a 
nuisance  to  his  master,  who  turned  him  out  of  the  house.  At 
this  treatment  the  helpless  servant  burst  out  weeping,  and  the 
tears  fell  from  his  eyes.  Weeping,  he  cried  :  Is  this  the  reward 
of  my  faithfulness  ?  If  you  had  feared  God,  if  ever  so  little, 
you  would  not  have  treated  me  thus. 


58 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE  EASY. 


NINTH    LESSON. 


20. — VERBS  (continued). 

The   following    Verbs   are   IRREGULAR    in   the   PAST 
PARTICIPLE  (and  PAST  TENSE). 

PRESENT  PAST 

INFINITIVE.  STEM.  PARTICIPLE.  PARTICIPLE. 


to  go,  jana 

jab-nab 

s 

]ab 

jata 

jab-tah 

graya 

ga-yah 

to  do,  karna 

kar-nah 

kar 

kar 

karta 

kar-tah 

kiya 

ke-yah 

to  be,  hona 

hoh-nah 

ho 

hoh 

hota 

hob  -tab 

hua 

hu-ah 

to  give,  dena1 

day-nah 

de 

day 

deta 

day-  tab 

diya 

de-yah 

to  take,  lena 

lay-nah 

Ie 

lay 

leta 

lay-tab 

liya 

le-yah 

to  say,  kaihna* 

kai'b-nah 

kaih 

kai'h 

kaihta 

kai'h-tah 

kaha 

ka-hab 

to  die,  xnarna 

mar-nab 

mar 

mar 

marta 

mar-tab 

mara  or  mua 

ma-rah.  mu-ab 

1  dena,  Imperative  :  do. 
2  kaihna,  Imperative  :  kaho. 

26. 

1.  us  ne  kaha,  main  ne  kalia ;  2.  us  ne  kaha 
hai,  ham  ne  kaha  hai  ;  3.  yeh  kaho,  yeh 
karo;  4.  main  ne  yeh  kiya  hai,  ve  yeh 
karte  ham ;  5.  kya  turn  ne  yeh  kiya  ?  6.  yeh 
mujhko  do;  7.  main  yeh  apko  deta  him;  8. 
unhon  ne  yeh  hamko  diya  hai ;  9.  kya  turn  ne 
isko  liya  hai  ?  10.  main  Inglistan  ko  jata  hun ; 
11.  ve  "Malva"  se  gaye  hain;  12.  wuh  gaya 
hai,  wuh  bhi  gray!  (g-a'i)  hai. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST.  59 

26a. 

1.  he  said,  I  said  ;  2.  he  has  said,  we  have  said  ; 
3.  say  it,  do  it  ;  4.  I  have  done  it,  they  are  doing  it ; 
5.  did  you  do  it  ?  or  have  you  done  it  ?  6.  give  it  to  me  ; 
7.  I  give  it  to  you  ;  8.  they  have  given  it  to  us  ;  9.  did 
you  take  it  ?  or  have  you  taken  it  ?  10.  I  am  going  to 
England  ;  11.  they  have  gone  by  the  "  Malva  "  ;  12.  he 
has  gone,  she  has  also  gone. 


to  put  rakhna 

rak'h-nah 

to  know          janana 

jah-na-nah 

to  sing  gana 

gah-nah 

as  far  as  jahan  tak 

ja-hahx0  tak 


song  git,  m. 

gueet 

box  baks,  m. 

baks 

servant  naukar,  m. 

naw-kar 

known  malum 

mah-loom 


27. 

1.  mez  par  chizen  rakho ;      2.  us  ne  kitaben 
baks  men  rakhi  hain  ;    3.  us  ne  ek  git  gaya; 

4.  jahan  tak  main  Janata  hun  ;      5.  ham  nahin 
jante  the  or  hamen  nahin  malum  tha  ;    6.  main 
nahin  janta  hun  or  mujhe  nahm  malum   hai; 

7.  kisne  ise   vahan   rakha  ?    8.  naukar  is  baks 
ko   yahan  laya  hai. 

27a. 

1.  put  the  things  on  the  table  ;    2.  he  has  put  the  books 
in  the  box  ;     3.  he  sang  a  song  ;      4.  as  far  as  I  know  ; 

5.  we  did  not  know  (=to  us  not  known  was)  ;    6.  I  do  not 
know  (=to  me  not  known  is) ;      7.  who  put  it  there  ? 

8.  the  servant  has  brought  this  box  (here). 


60 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


station         isteshan,  m. 

is-tay-shun 

carriage         grari,  f. 

gah-ree 

train  rel  gari,  f. 

rayl  gah-ree 

mail  or  post     dak,  f. 
dahk 

mail-train     dak  gari,  f . 

(express)        dahk  gah-ree 


now 


ab 


ab 


yet  abtak  or  abhi 

ab-tak.  ab-iiee 

which  ?        kaunsa  (i)  ? 

kawn-sah  1  kawn-see  ? 

land  des,  m. 

daice 

to  travel       safar  karna 

(—journey  to  do)     sa-far  kar-nah 


28. 


1.  isteshan  jane  ka  ab  vakt  hai ;  2.  kya  yen 
hamari  rel  gran  hai  ?  :'>.  hainari  kaunsi  gari  hai  ? 
4.  yeh  garian  achchhi  hain ;  5.  yeh  dak  gari 
hai ;  6.  hamko  lamba  safar  karna  hai ;  7.  safar 
kitna  lamba  hai  ?  8.  main  nahm  janta  hun ; 

9.  yeh  safar  khubsurat  hai ;        10.  ham  des  ke 
na'e  hisse  men  se  jate  hain. 

28a. 

1.  it  is  now  time  to  go  to  the  station  ;  2.  is  this  our 
train  ?  3.  which  is  our  carriage  ?  4.  these  carriages  are 
good  ;  5.  this  is  the  mail  train  ;  6.  we  have  to  travel  a  long 
way  (=to  us  long  journey  to  do  is)  ;  7.  how  long  is  the 
journey  ?  8.  I  do  not  know  ;  9.  it  is  a  beautiful  journey  ; 

10.  we  go  through  a  new  part  of  the  land. 


SOME  USEFUL  ADVERBS. 


always  hamesha 

ham-ay-shah 

already  paihle  hi 

pai'h-lay  hee 

at  once  fauran 

faw-ran 

often  aksar 

ak  sar 


ever  kabhl 

kab-hee 

never          kabhi  nahm 

kab-hee  na-heei«; 

sometimes    kabhl  kabhl 
kab-hee  kab-hee 

perhaps        shayad 

shah-yad 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST.  61 


just  or 

JUSt  now          J  ab-hee 

too  or          jnihayat 

exceedingly  J      ne-hah-yat 

by  chance    ittifakan 

it-te-fiih-kan 


soon  jald,  jaldi 

djald,  djal-dee 

quickly      jaldi,  jaldi  se 

djal-dee,  cljal-dee  say 

slowly         ahista 

ah-his-tah 

NOTE. — hi  (or  I)  can  be  added  to  some  Adverbs  to  intensify  the 
meaning,  as  :  jald  soon,  jaldi  or  jaldhi  very  soon  ;  ab  now,  abhl  just 
now.  For  other  Adverbs  and  adverbial  expressions,  refer  to  List  of  Indis- 
pensable Words.  See  Index. 

_29. 

1.  main  ab  ghar  jata  hun ;  2.  liam  jald  ja  rahe 
ham  ;  3.  ab  yeh  karo ;  4.  use  jaldi  (or  jaldhi)  lao ; 
5.  us  ne  yeh  fauran  hi  kiya ;  6.  main  yeh  abhi 
karta  hun ;  7.  us  ne  paihle  hi  yeh  kar  liya  hai. 

29a. 

1.  I  am  going  home  now  ;  2.  we  are  going  soon  ;  3.  do 
it  now  ;  4.  bring  it  quickly  ;  5.  he  did  it  at  once  ;  6.  I  am 
doing  it  now  (just  now) ;  7.  he  has  done  it  already. 

30. 

1.  ahista  boliye ;  2.  ap  nihayat  jaldi  bolte 
haiii  ;  3.  kya  ap  kabhi  Calcutte  gaye  hain  ? 
4.  nahm,  main  vahan  kabhT  nahm  gaya  ;  5.  main 
kabhi  kabhi  Banaras  jata  hun  ;  6.  shayad  ham 
Bamba'i  ja  rahe  hain ;  7.  wuh  aksar  hamare 
ghar  (par)  ata  hai ;  8.  amir  admi  ke  hamesha 
bahut  dost  hote  hain. 

30a. 

1.  please  speak  slowly  ;  2.  you  speak  too  (or  exceedingly) 
quickly  ;  3.  have  you  ever  been  (=gone)  to  Calcutta  ? 
4.  no,  I  have  never  been  (=gone)  there  ;  5.  I  sometimes 
go  to  Benares  ;  6.  perhaps  we  are  going  to  Bombay  ;  7.  he 
often  comes  to  our  house  ;  8.  a  rich  man  has  always  many 
friends  (=of  a  rich  man  always  many  friends  are). 


62 


HUGO  S  HINDUSTANI    MADE    KAST. 


CONVERSATIONAL    PHRASES. 


In  the  Conversational  Phrases,  the  Imitated  Pronunciation  will  now 
be  discontinued.  Where  necessary  or  advisable,  the  Imitated  Pronuncia- 
tion will  be  given  in  the  Explanatory  Notes. 


What  date  is  it  ? 

These  letters  are  not 
dated. 

Will  you  post  these  let- 
ters for  me  ? 

He  will  send  the  answer 
to-morrow. 

What  do  you  call  this 
thing  ? 

What  is  that  called  in 
Hindustani  ? 

It  is  difficult  to  remem- 
ber all  these  names. 

What  is  the  lowest 
price  ? 

How  much  will  you 
take  for  it  ? 

How  do  you  sell  these 
things  ? 

We  have  paid  a  high 
price. 

I  cannot  give  it  for 
less. 


1.  Aj  kya  tarikh  hai  ? 
2-  In   khaton   par    tarikh 
nahm  hai. 

3.  Kya  turn  mere  liye  yeh 

khat  dal  doge  ? 

4.  Wuh  kal    jawab    bhej 

dega. 

5.  Turn  us  chiz  ko  kya  kai- 

hate  ho  ? 

6.  Isko_  Hindustani     men 

kya  kaihte  hain  ? 

7.  In  sab  namon  ko    yad 

rakhna  mushkil  hai. 

8.  Kam  se  kam  dam  kya 

hai? 

9.  Iske  liye  turn  kya  log-e  ? 

10.  Yeh  chizefi  turn  kaise 

bechte  ho? 

11.  Ham  ne  zyada  dam  diya 

hai. 

12.  Main  ise  kam  men  nahm 

de  sakta. 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  phrases. 

1  literally,  to-day  what  date  is  ?  2  lit.,  these  letters  on  date  not  is  ; 
4  he  to-morrow  answer  send  will  do  ;  8  kam  se  kam,  lowest ;  lit.,  less 
by  less  ;  9  kya,  what=how  much  ;  11  lit.,  by  we  more  than  price  given  id. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY".  68 

PROGRESSIVE    READING, 
with  Literal  Translation  and  correct  English  Rendering. 


The  Imitated  Pronunciation  is  now  no  longer  necessary.      In  the  case  of 

words  which  may  present  any  difficulty,  the  Imitated  Pronunciation   will 

be  found  in  the  foot-notes.     Such  words  are  marked  1,  2,  3,  etc. 


Ek  burha  admi  badan  se  dubla  aur  kamzor  tha. 

An       old         man      body      by     thin      and         weak      was. 

Usko  beta  na  hone  se  roti   o   kapre   ki  taraf  se 
Him        son    not  having  from  bread  and  clothes      of     from 

beflkri  na  thi.  Wuh  jangal  men  jaya  karta  tha 
no-anxiety  not  was.      He  the  forest    in      going      used       was 

aur  vahan  se   sukha    indhan     ikat-tha-kar    ke 

and      there     from      dry  fuel  gathered  having 

lakarion  ke  bojhe  ko  sar  par  utha-kar,    bazar 
fire-sticks      of    bundle  head    on        carrying,        bazaar 

men  leja-kar  becha  karta   tha.    Ek  roz   gharib 

in  take  do    selling        used      to.       One    day    the  poor 

bur  ha  thakan  se    itna    tang-ay  a    ki  usne   bojha 

old  man  fatigue  from  so  much  worried  became  that   he      bundle 

sar    se    gira-diya.     Wuh  musibat  men  ohillane 
head  from     threw-off.  He        distress       in        to  cry 

laga  ki :    "  Ai  maut !    mujhe  utha-le  aur  duniya 

m  (that)  :  "  Oh  death  !         me          lift  up      and     world 


ki  taklifon  se  riha'i  de."     Uski  is  khahish  par 
of       troubles  from  release  give."       His   this        wish          at 

yam  ke    dut    uske  samne  hazir-hu'e  aur 

the  god  of  death  of  the  agents  him      before        appeared        and 

us  se   puchhne  lage   ki:    "Ham   kyufi  bulaye 

him        asking        began  (that)  :     "  We         why        called 


64  HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 

graye  hain  ?  "    Unki  daravam  shakalen  dekh-kar, 

to  come  are  ? "         Their      fearful       appearances       seeing, 

burha       kanpne    lagu    aur     un     se    bola    ki : 

the  old  man  trembling     began     and     them     to    spoke  (that) : 

"  Dosto  !    zara  is  bojhe  ko  sar  par  uthane  men 

"Friends!      just   this   bundle     to   head  on       lifting          in 

meri  madad  karo  ta  ki  main    apne   raste    par 
me  help        do        so  that      I        my  (own)   way        on 

chalne    lagufi.    Apki  ban  meharbani  hogi  aur 
walk        can  begin.     You  of  great        kindness    would  be    and 

main    apka    tah-i-dil         se    mashkur    hunga." 
I          to-you   bottom  of  heart  from    grateful        shall  be." 

Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 

There  was  an  old  man  who  was  thin  and  weak  of  body.  He 
had  no  son  to  relieve  him  of  the  anxiety  of  providing  food  and 
clothes.  He  used  to  go  into  the  forest  (jungle)  to  gather  dry  sticks 
for  fire-wood,  and  to  carry  the  bundle  on  his  head  to  sell  in  the 
bazaar.  One  day  the  poor  old  man  was  so  distressed  with  weari- 
ness that  he  threw  the  bundle  from  his  head  and  in  his  misery 
cried  to  the  god  of  death  to  take  him  out  of  this  troublesome  world. 

At  his  request  the  agents  of  death  appeared  before  him  and 
asked  why  he  had  called  them.  At  the  sight  of  their  terrible 
appearance  he  began  to  tremble,  and  said  :  Friends,  help  me  to 
lift  this  bundle  on  to  my  head,  so  that  I  may  continue  on  my  way. 
For  your  great  kindness,  I  should  be  grateful  from  the  bottom  of 
my  heart. 

Mele  men.— Aj  salana  male  ka  din  hai.    Bahut 
Fair        in. — To-day  annual      fair       of    day     is.  Many 

saudagar   apna   mal   bechne   ko   bahar   se    aye 
merchants       their     wares      to  sell  outside   from  come 

hain.     Ham   ab  Banarasi   sari,   Kashmiri   shal, 
are.  We      now      Benares    sarongs,      Cashmere    shawls, 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY.  65 

aur  Dhake  ki  barik  malmal     apni      liasb     pa- 

and      Dacca     of     fine         muslin        each-one  according  to 

sand    kharid  sakenge.      Aspas  ke  mukamon  se 

liking        buy   will  be  able  to.   Neighbourhood  of   places    from 

hazaron  gaun*  ke  log  mela  dekhne  ko  aye  hain. 

thousands  villages  of  people  fair          see        to    come     are. 

Yen   unki   sada  zaruriyat  ka    ilm  hasil  karne 
This      their    simple        wants        of  knowledge    obtaining 

ka  achcha  mauka  hai.       Subah     ko    yen     log 
of         good    opportunity  is.     In-the-morning        these  people 

Ganga  men  nahate   hain   aur    Brahman    puro- 

Ganges       in        bathing        are      and         Brahmin       priests 

niton   ko  dan   dete   hain.       Se  paihar  ko  yen 

of  charity   giving    are.  In  the  afternoon     these 

apni-apni    kharidari   karte    hain   aur   sham  ko 

each-their  purchases       doing      are     and   in  the  evening 

Ganga    ki    bhakti    ke    bhajan    gate    hain. 
Ganges      to      devotion      of        psalms    singing      are. 

*  After  numeral  adjectives  like  twenty,  a  hundred,  a  thousand,  the  noun 
may  be  used  in  the  singular  or  plural. 


Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 
At  the  Fair. — To-day  is  the  day  of  the  annual  fair.  Nume- 
rous merchants  have  come  to  sell  their  wares  from  other  parts  of 
the  country.  You  will  now  be  able  to  buy  here  the  Benares  Sari 
(sarongs),  the  Cashmere  shawls  and  the  Dacca  fine  muslin,  accord- 
ing to  your  choice.  Thousands  of  villagers  from  neighbouring 
places  have  come  here  to  see  the  fair.  It  is  a  good  opportunity 
for  getting  a  knowledge  of  their  simple  wants.  In  the  morning 
all  these  persons  will  bathe  in  the  Ganges  and  give  charity  to 
Brahmin  priests.  In  the  afternoon  they  do  their  marketing,  and 
in  the  evening  they  sing  psalms  of  devotion  to  the  Ganges. 

H.8. — 3 


66 


HUGO  ri   HINDUSTANI   HADE    EASY. 


TENTH    LESSON. 


21. — The  FUTURE  TENSE   is  formed    by  adding   the 
following  terminations  to  the  STEM  of  the  verb  : 

MASC.  SING.        FEM.  SING.  MASO.  PLOB.       FEM.  PL0R. 


1st  Person    unga 

oonfl-gah 

ungi 

3rd    „        ega 

ay-gah 

egi 

ay-guee 

2ndPeron{£ 

ary  and          Og6 
ate  form        oh  -gay 

enge 
enge 


engm 

enp-guee»0 

engin 


Ogl 

oh-guee 


2ndPerson{;XlfoU™ud      eflge          engm 


I  shall  (or  will)  speak 
be  will  (or  shall)  speak 
she  shall  (or  will)  speak 
we  shall  (or  will)  speak 

yon  shall  (or  will)  speak 
they  shall  (or  will)  speak 


EXAMPLE. 

main  bolunga  or  bolungl 

wuh  bolega 

wuh  bolegl 

ham  bolenge  or  bolengin 

(turn  bologe  or  bologl 

tap  bolenge  or  bolengin 

ve  bolenge  or  bolengin 


In  the  case  of  hona,  and  some  other  verbs  of  which  the 
Stem  ends  in  6  or  O,  the  above  forms  are  contracted,  thus  : 


I  shall  or  will  be                      main  hunga  or  htingl 
he  shall  or  will  be                    wuh  hoga 
she  shall  or  will  be                 wuh  hog! 
we  shall  or  will  be                  ham  honge  or  hofigln 

(  turn  hoge  or  hogi 
you  shall  or  will  be                 \  ap  hofi|e  or  ho°gm 

they  shall  or  will  be               ve  honge  or  hongln 

day                  din,  roz,  m. 

din,  rose 

night              rat,  f  . 

raht 

to-day              aj 

ahdj 

to-night          ajrat 

ahdj  -raht 

to-morrow  )      kal 
yesterday    )      kill 

morning            SUbah 
su-bah 

evening             sliam 
shahm 

noon              do  paihar 

doh  pai-har 

HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE    EAST.  67 


afternoon          se  pailiar 
say  pai-har 


midnight         adhi-rat 

ahd-hee-raht 


one  of  these  days        ajkal  men  (ahdj-kal  may**) 


IF  agar 

a-gar 


OR  ya 

yah 


31.  _ 

1.  main  do  paihar  taiyar  hunga ;  2.  ham  is 
se  paihar  masruf  honge ;  3.  kya  ap  aj  sham 
(or  is  sham  ko)  ghar  par  honge  ?  4.  ve  ajrat 
theatar  men  na*  honge  ;  5.  main  subah  ghar 
par  hunga  ;  6.  wuh  aj  vakt  par  na  hogi. 

*  na,  short  for  nahln,  NOT. 

31a. 

1.  I  shall  be  ready  at  noon ;  2.  we  shall  be  busy  this 
afternoon  ;  3.  will  you  be  at  home  this  evening  ?  4.  they 
will  not  be  at  the  theatre  to-night  ;  5.  I  shall  be  at  home 
in  the  morning  ;  6.  she  will  not  be  in  time  to-day. 

32._ 

1.  main  use  yeh  kahunga  ;  2.  ham  unhen  wuh 
na  kahenge  ;  3.  wuh  aj  ya  kal  likhega ;  4.  ham 
ajkal  men  likhenge ;  5.  main  apke  dost  ke  sath 
ja'unga ;  6.  wuh  apko  yeh  degi  ;  7.  ham  un 
chizon  ko  bechenge  ;  8.  main  yeh  ghora  na 
kharidunga. 

32a. 

1. 1  shall  say  it  to  him  (=1  shall  tell  him  so) ;  2.  we 
shall  not  say  it  to  them  (=we  shall  not  tell  them) ;  3.  he 
will  write  to-day  or  to-morrow  ;  4.  we  shall  write  one  of 
these  days  ;  5.  I  shall  go  with  your  friend  ;  6.  she  will 
give  it  to  you  ;  7.  we  shall  sell  those  things  ;  8.  I  shall 
not  buy  this  horse. 


68  HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI  MADE    EAST. 

The  CONDITIONAL  FUTURE  is  the  same  as  the  Future, 
omitting  the  terminations  ga,  ge,  gi,  gin.      Examples  : 
I  should  (or  would)  speak  main  bolun 

he  should  (or  would)  speak  wnh  bole 

we  should  (or  would)  speak  ham  bolen 

(turn  bolo 
you  should  (or  would)  speak  j  ap  bolefi 

they  should  (or  would)  speak  ve  bolen 

if  I  speak  or  if  I  should  speak        agar  main  bolun,  etc. 

The  CONDITIONAL  PAST  is  expressed  by  the  Present 
Participle  of  the  verb,  generally  preceded  by  agar,  IP. 

if  I  spoke  or  if  I  had  spoken,  etc.     agar  main  bolta  or  boltl,  etc 


season  mausim,  m. 


maw-sim 


summer  garmi,  f. 

(hot  season)    gar-mee 

rainy  season      barsat,  f. 
bar-saht 

winter  jar  a,  m. 

(cold  season)    jah-rah 


to  wear  paihnana 

pai'h-na-nah 

clothes  kapre,  m. 

kap-ray 

woollen  uni 

oo-nee 

cotton  SUtl 

BOO- tee 


33. 

1.  Hindustan  men  tin  mausim  hote  hain.  2. 
Garmi  March  se  Jun  tak  raihti  hai.  3.  Barsat 
Jula'i  se  Aktubar  tak  raihti  hai.  4.  Jara  Na- 
vambar  se  Farvari  tak  raihta  hai.  5.  Hindusta- 
ni log  garmi  aur  barsat  men  suti  kapre  istimal 
karte  hain.  6.  Jare  men  Hindustani  log  uni 

kapre  paihnate  hain. 

33a. 

1.  There  are  three  seasons  in  India.  2.  The  hot  season 
(summer)  is  from  March  to  June.  3.  The  rainy  season  is 
from  July  to  October.  4.  The  cold  season  (winter)  is  from 
November  to  February.  5.  Indian  people  use  cotton  clothes 
in  the  hot  and  rainy  seasons.  6.  In  the  cold  season  Indian 
people  wear  woollen  clothes. 


HUGO  S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST. 


69 


CONVERSATIONAL    PHRASES. 


This  is  a  cheap  article. 
That  is  good  enough. 
This      is      not      good 

enough. 
Show     me     something 

better. 
Who  has  paid  you  ? 

We  have  paid  for  all 
the  luggage. 

Have  you  told  the  car- 
rier (porter)  to  come  ? 

I  told  him  an  hour 
ago. 

Did  you  hear  what  I 
said  ? 

I  have  called  you  many 
times. 

Listen  when  I  speak  to 
you. 

It  is  very  late,  we  will 
go  home  now. 

I  bought  this  ring  yes- 
terday. 

I  want  to  change  it. 


1.  Yell  ek  sasti  chiz  hai. 

2.  Wuh  kafi  achchhi  hai. 

3.  Yeli  kafi  achchha  nahm 

hai. 

4.  Mujhe  kuchh  zyada  ach- 

chhi  ehiz  dikhao. 

5.  Tu.in.ko  kisne  dam  diya 

hai? 

6.  Ham    ne    sab  asbab  ka 

dam  diya  hai. 

7.  Kya  turn  ne  baire  ko  ane 

ke  liye  kaha  hai  ? 

8.  Ek  ghanta  hua  main  ne 

usko  kaha. 

9.  Main   ne  jo  kaha    kya 

turn  ne  suna? 

10.  Main_ne_tumko  bar  bar 

bulaya  hai. 

11.  Jab  main  turn  se  bolun 

tab  su.no. 

12.  Bahut  der  hui,  ab  ham 

ghar  jaengre. 

13.  Main  yeh  angii  thi  kal 

kharidi  thi. 

14.  Main  ise  badalna  chahta 

hun. 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  Phrases. 

4  literally,  to  me  some  more  good  thing  show  ;  5  lit.,  to  you,  by  whom 
price  given  is  ?  9  lit.,  1  what  said  you  heard  ?  11  lit.,  when  I  to  you  apeaJi, 
then  bear  ;  12  bahut  der  hui=mueh  lateness  is. 


70 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE  EASY. 


Which  of  the  two  do 

you  like  best  ? 
This  one  or  that  one  ? 
I  like  them  both. 

The  one  is  as  good  as 

the  other. 

How    much   are   these 
I  like  these.       [beads  ? 

I  do  not  like  those. 

How  many  rupees  have 

I  to  pay  ? 

Wrap  them  up,  please. 
Please  send  the  parcel 

to  the  hotel. 
Let  him  go. 
Let      him    do    as    he 

likes. 
Will  you  allow  me  to 

do  it? 
I  allow  you  to  do  it. 

We  were  obliged  to  leave 
early  this  morning. 

I  was  obliged  to  do 
it 


1.  In  donon  mefi  turn  ko 

kaun   ziyada    pasand 

2.  Yeh  ya  wuli  ?          [hai  ? 

3.  Mujhe    donon     pasand 

hain. 

4.  Yen  utm  hi  achchhi  hai 

jitm  ki  wuh. 

5.  Yeh  dane  kitne  ke  hain  ? 

6.  Main  inhen  pasand  kar- 

ta  nun. 

7.  Main  unhen  pasand  na- 

hin  karta. 

8.  Mujhe  kitne  rupaye  dene 

hain  ? 

9.  Inko  lapet  dijiye. 

10.  Parsal  hotal  ho  bhej  dl- 


_ 

11.  Usko  jane  do. 

12.  Jaisa    wuh   chahe    use 

karne  do. 

13.  Kya    ap    mujhko    yeh 

karne  denge  ? 

14.  Main_tumko  yeh  karne 

deta  nun. 

15.  Hamko     aj     jilassjibah 

rukhsat  hona  para  tha. 

16.  Mujhe  yeh  karna  para 

tha. 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  Phrases. 
1  literally,  the  JWG  in,  you  which  more  like  do  ?     4  for  '  as  good  as,' 
see  Lesson  12  ;       8  in  Hindustani,  '  to  pay  '  is  rendered  by  '  to  !:ive,' 
dena. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE  BAST.  71 

PROGRESSIVE    READING, 
with  Literal  Translation  and  correct  English  Rendering. 


Logron  ki    zubam      suna-jata  hai  ki  kuclih  sal 

People      of  from  the  toneue  to  be  heard   is    that    some    years 

hue  ek  chhote  se  kasbe  men  ek     kazi      raihta 
ago    one      small       little-town    in        a    magistrate     used  to 

tha   jis   men   apm    kuchh   bhi     akal     na   thi. 
live  whom     in    himself        some-what    intelligence  not    was. 

"Wuh     kitabon   ke  lafzoii  men  yakin  karta  tha 
He  books      of        words      in        believe      used  to 

aur   unko   amal   men   lata  tha.     Ek  dafa"  uski 

and      them       action        in        to  bring.  Once          his 

afikhon  ko  ek   kitab   men  ek   flkra  nazar  aya 

eyes  to,     a        book        in,    one  sentence  visible  became 

jiska    matlab    yeh  tha  ki  jis  shakhs  ka  chhota 

of  which  the  meaning  this  was  that  any     person       of       small 

sar    ho    aur  Iambi  darhi  ho  wuh    zarur  bewa- 
head  being    and     Icng        beard  being     he  necessarily        fool 

kuf  hota  hai.      Kazi  ne  apne  ap  ko   a'me     men 

is.         The  magistrate  his  own  self  looking-glass      in 

dekh-kar    kaha   ki :    Mera  sar  chhota  hai,  aur 
seeing          said  (that) :       My      head     small         is,       and 

darhi  Iambi  hai ;    sar    ka   barhana   namumkin 

beard        long         is ;      head     of      increasing        impossible 

hai  lekin  darhi  ko  chhoti  kar  sakta  hun.    Chu- 

is          but        beard     to         small  make    can         do.         Ac- 

nache  usne  kainchi  talash   ki,    magar   kaifichi 
cordingly     he      scissors    for  searched,        however      sciasora 


72  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 

na    mill.     Jab  aur  kuclili  samajh  men  na  aya 

not  were  found.  When  anything  else       mind        in       not  came 

to  usne  ek  hath  se  adhi  darhi    ko    dhak  kar, 
then    he    one    hand  with  half  of  beard  covered  having, 

baki       adhi    ko  diya-sala'i  se  ag  laga-di.    Jab 
remaining    half      to        match        with  fire        set.       When 

balon  ke  jalne  se   shola   ka  sek   hath    ko   pa- 
hairs       of  burning  with  flame      of    heat     hand       to 

huncha,    to    usne     hath     hata  liya    aur     uski 
reached,      then      he          hand        withdrew          and         his 

kul    darhi    jal-gayi.        Kazi       nihayat     shar- 

whole    beard    burned  was.     The  magistrate  extremely 

minda     hua     kyunki     is     vake    se    uski    be- 

ashamed      was        because         this      event    by      his 

wakufi     puri-taur-se     zahir    ho  grayi. 
folly  completely  manifest  to  be  came. 

Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 

People  say  that  some  years  ago  there  lived  in  a  small  town  a 
magistrate  who  had  no  intelligence  whatever,  and  who  used  to 
believe  anything  that  was  written  in  a  book,  and  then  act  upon  it. 

One  day  his  eyes  fell  on  a  sentence  in  a  book,  the  meaning  of 
which  was,  that  if  a  person  had  a  small  head  and  a  long  beard,  he 
must  of  necessity  be  a  fool. 

The  magistrate  seeing  himself  in  a  looking-glass,  said  :  Cer- 
tainly my  head  is  small  and  my  beard  is  long.  It  is  impossible 
to  make  my  head  larger,  but  I  can  make  my  beard  shorter. 
Accordingly  he  searched  for  a  pair  of  scissors,  but  no  scissors  were 
to  be  found.  As  he  could  not  think  of  anything  else,  he  covered 
one  half  of  his  beard  with  one  hand,  and  with  a  match  set  fire  to 
the  other  half.  When  the  flame  of  the  burning  hair  reached  his 
hand,  he  withdrew  it,  and  the  whole  beard  was  burnt. 

Then  the  magistrate  was  extremely  ashamed,  because  by  this 
fact  his  folly  became  completely  manifest. 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 78 

ELEVENTH    LESSON. 

1.  CAN,  TO  BE  ABLE  TO  Sakna  (sack-nab) 

2.  TO  WANT,  WISH  Or  DESIRE  TO     Chahna  (chah'h-nah) 

3.  TO  WANT  or  NEED  zarurat  hona 

(=to  be  in  need  of)  za-roo-rat  ho-nah 

4.  MAY,  TO  BE  ALLOWED  TO          jjazat  hona 

(=to  have  permission)  e-jah-zat  ho-nah 

5.  MUST,  OUGHT,  to  be  obliged  to     Ch.ah.iye  (chah-he-yay) 

(invariable)  ='  necessary  is 
zarurat,  f.=need  ;    ijazat,  f.=permission. 

22. — REMARKS  ON  THE  ABOVE  VERBS. 

1. — The  Verb  preceding  sakna  is  used  in  the  stem  form 
only,  and  sakna  has  the  conjugation.     Examples  : 

I  shall  be  able  to  buy  it  main  yeh  kharld  sakufiga 

he  will  be  able  to  go  wuh  ja  sakega 

we  shall  be  able  to  do  it  ham  yeh  kar  sakenge 

they  cannot  sell  it  ve  yeh  nahm  bech  sakte  haifi 

2. — Chahna  is  conjugated  in  the  ordinary  way. 

I  want  or  wish  to  sing  main  gana  chahta  hun 

(=1  to  sing  desiring  am) 

they  want  or  wish  to  speak     ve  bolna  chahte  hain 

(=they  to  speak  desiring  are) 

we  want  or  wish  to  buy  ham  kh.arld.na  chahte  hain 

(=we  to  buy  desiring  are) 

3. — In  sentences  with  zarurat  hona,  the  Subject  is 
put  in  the  OBJECTIVE  Case.    Examples  : 

1  want  or  need  books  mujhe  kitabon  kl  zarurat  hai 

(=to  me  of  books  need  is) 

we  want  or  need  a  carriage  hamen  garl  kl  zarurat  hai 
(=to  us  a  carriage  of  need  ia) 

4.—  The  same  applies  to  the  use  of  ijazat  hona. 

May  I  see  this  book  ?         Kya  mujhe  is  kitab  ko  dekhne 

kl  ijazat  hai  ? 

(==  whether  to  me  this  book  of  to  see  permission  is) 
Are  we  allowed  or  have     Kya  hamen  jane  kl  ijazat  hai  T 
we  permission  to  go  f        (=whether  to  us  to  go  permission  u  ) 

H.S.— 3* 


74  HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 

5. — In  sentences  with  Chahiye  (= necessary),  the  Sub- 
ject is  also  put  in  the  Objective  Case.  Examples  : 

I  must  or  ought  to  write          mujhko  likhna  chahiye 
(=to  me  to  write  necessary  is) 

you  must  or  ought  to  speak     apko  bolna  chahiye 

(=to  you  to  speak  necessary  is) 

John  must  or  ought  to  go        Jaun  ko  jana  chahiye 
(=to  John  to  go  necessary  is) 

34. 

1.  wuh  ja  sakta  hai ;  2.  usko  bolne  ki  ijazat 
hai ;  3.  ve  nahm  ja  sakte  hain  ;  4.  ham  usko 
nahifi  kar  sakte ;  5.  kya  ve  kal  jaenge  ?  6. 
maifi  kaJ  tak  nahm  janungra  ;  7.  main  isko  karna 
chahta  hun ;  8.  ham  ek  grhora  kharidna  chahte 
hain ;  9.  mujhko  kamre  ki  zarurat  hai. 

34a. 

1.  he  can  or  is  able  to  go  ;  2.  he  may  or  is  allowed  to 
speak  (—to  him  to  speak  permission  is)  ;  3.  they  can  not 
go  ;  4.  we  can  not  do  it ;  5.  will  they  go  to-morrow  ? 
6.  I  shall  not  know  till  to-morrow  ;  7.  I  want  (desire)  to 
do  it ;  8.  we  wish  to  buy  a  horse  ;  9. 1  want  (need)  a  room. 


TO  OPEN    kholna     TO  SHUT  band  karna 

k'hohl-nah  band  kar-nah 

TO  BE  BOUND  or  OBLIGED  TO       lazim  hona 

lah-zim  ho-nah 

35. 

1.  apko  aj  bolna  chahiye  ;  2.  ham  ko  yeh  kar- 
na chahiye ;  3.  mujhko  yeh  karna  chahiye  ; 
4.  turn  ko  jana  hoga  ;  5.  usko  yeh  karna  hogra  ; 
6.  mujhe  yeh  kharidna  hogra  ;  7.  turn  ko  yeh 
dekhna  lazim  hai ;  8.  main  darvaza  khol  nahifi 
sakta  hufi  ;  9.  darvaza  band  karo  ;  10.  ve  ap  se 
milna  chahte  hain;  11.  kya  apko  is  hotal  mefl 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE  EAST.  75 

kamre  ki  zarurat  hai  ?     12.  kya  tumko  kuchh 
rupaye  ki  zarurat  hai  ? 

35a. 

1.  you  must  speak  to-day  ;  2.  we  must  do  it ;  3.  I 
ought  to  do  it ;  4.  you  will  have  to  go  ;  5.  he  will  have 
to  do  it ;  6.  I  shall  have  to  buy  it ;  7.  you  are  bound  to 
see  it ;  8.  I  cannot  open  the  door  ;  9.  shut  the  door  ; 
10.  they  want  to  meet  you  ;  11.  do  you  want  a  room  in 
this  hotel  ?  12.  do  you  want  any  (=some)  money  ? 


minute  minat,  m. 


second  secand,  m. 


twenty-four      chaublS 


week  hafta,  m. 

haf-tah  min-att 

month  mahma,  m. 

ma-hee-nah 

year  sal,  m. 

eahl  chaw -bees 

hour  ghanta,  m.      sixty       sath 

g'han-tab  saht'b 

equal  barabar  (bar-ah-bar) 

NOTE. — When  stating  a  general  fact  use  hota  hai  (is  being),  or  hote 
nain  (are  being),  instead  of  merely  hai,  hain. 

36. 

1.  ek  sal  mefl  barah  mahine  hote  haifi;  2. 
ek  mahine*  men  char  hafte  hote  hain;  3.  ek 
hafta  sat  dinon  ke  barabar  hota  hai ;  4.  ek  din 
o  rat  (=din  aur  rat)  men  chaubis  g-hante  hote 
hain ;  5.  ek  ghanta  sath  minat  hota  hai ;  6.  ek 
minat  men  sath  secand  hote  hain. 

*Before  a  Preposition  final  a  changes  into  e. 

36a. 

1.  a  year  has  twelve  months  (literally,  a  year  in,  twelve 
months  are)  ;  2.  a  month  has  four  weeks  (lit.  a  month  in, 
four  weeks  are) ;  3.  a  week  has  seven  days  (lit.  one  week, 
seven  days  equal  is)  ;  4.  a  day  and  night  have  twenty - 
four  hours  ;  .5.  an  hour  has  sixty  minutes  ;  6.  a  minute 
has  sixty  seconds  (lit.  a  minute  in,  sixty  seconds  are). 


76                             HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 

forest                jangal,  m. 

jan^-gal 

near                  nazdlk 

naz-deek 

tree                darakht,  m. 

da-rah'cht 

only                   Sirf 

sirf 

village               gaufi,*  m. 
gah-unp 

different            mukhtalif 
muh'ch-ta-lif 

road                 sarak,  m. 

Ba-rak 

generally       am  taur  par 
ahm  tavrr  par 

path               rasta,  m. 

rahs-tah 

sacred               pak 

pahk 

footpath          pagdandi,  f  . 

pag-dan?-dee 

canal              naihar,  f. 

nai-har 

animal              janvar,  m. 

jahn-var 

bullet                goll,  f. 
goh-lee 

peacock            mor,  m. 

mohr 

to  shoot       goli  chalana 

goh-lee  clia.-lah-nah 

monkey            bandar,  m. 

ban-dar 

to  reach       pahunchna 

pa-hur^ch-nah 

any  Other  part          klSl  aur  hiSSe  (kis-ee  awr  his-say) 

*gaufi,  singular  ;  gaort,  plural.     The  singular  form  can  be  u?ed  with 
a  plural  meaning. 

37. 

1.  Hindustan  men  bare  bare  jangal  ham.  2. 
Yen  jangal  shaiharon  aur  gaon  ke  bahut  naz- 
dlk nahin  haifi.  3.  Hindustan  ke  ek  hisse  ke 
darakht  kisi  aur  hisse  ke  darakhton  se  mukh- 
talif hain.  4.  Hindustan  men  saraken  am  taur 
par  achchhi  hain. 

37a. 

1.  There  are  large  forests  in  India.  2.  These  forests 
are  not  very  near  to  towns  and  villages.  3.  The 
trees  in  one  part  of  India  are  different  from  those 
in  any  other  part.  4.  The  roads  in  India  are  generally 
good. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE  EASY.  77 

_38. 

1.  Jangalon  men  raste  sirf  pagdandian  hain. 
2.  Us  gaun  ko  pahunchne  ke  liye  naihar  se 
pagdandi  par  jana.  3.  Mor  aur  bandar  Hinduofi 
ke  liye  pak  janvar  hain.  4.  Un  par  kabhi  goli 
nahm  chalani  chahiye. 

38a. 

1.  The  paths  in  forests  are  only  footpaths.  2.  To  reach 
that  village  go  by  the  footpath  by  the  canal.  3.  Peacocks 
and  monkeys  are  sacred  animals  with  the  Indians.  4.  They 
must  never  be  shot  (= them  on  ever  bullet  not  shot  must  be). 


river  darya,  m.          shipping  jahazi 


dar-yah 

boat  kishtl,  f. 

kish-tee 

steamboat          agnbot,  f. 
(=fire  boat)         a-gun-boht 

ship  jahaz,  m. 

ja-hahz 


ja-hah-zee 

business       kar  o  bar,  m. 

kahr  oh  bahr 

sea  samandar,  m. 


sa-man-dar 


wild  animals  jangh  janval 

janj-lee  jahn-var 


39. 

1.  Calcutte  se  Peshawar  tak  sarak  bahut 
umda  (fine)  hai.  2.  Chhoti  kishtian  is  darya  men 
upar  (up)  ko  a  sakti  hain.  3.  Bare  agnbot  aur 
jahaz  upar  ko  darya  men  nahm  a  sakte.  4. 
Jahazi  kar  o  bar  Firangi  logon  ke  hath  (hands) 
men  hai.  5.  Jangalon  men  jangli  janvar  ba- 
kasrat  hain. 

39a. 

1.  The  road  from  Calcutta  to  Peshawar  is  very  fine.  2. 
Small  boats  can  come  up  this  river.  3.  Big  steamboats  and 
ships  cannot  come  up  the  river.  4.  The  shipping  business 
is  in  the  hands  of  Europeans.  5.  Wild  animals  abound  in 
the  forests. 


78 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   BAST. 


CONVERSATIONAL    PHRASES. 


Many  Englishmen  like 
to  learn  Hindustani. 

This   Englishman    can- 
not speak  our  language. 
Can      you      read      my 

writing  ? 
My  friend  can  speak  a 

little  English. 
Can    you   speak    Eng- 
lish ? 
Can     you     understand 

me  when  I  speak  to 

you  ? 
My    servant    must     be 

able    to     understand 

English. 
I  can  understand  you. 

Where  did    you     learn 

to  speak  English  ? 
You  speak  it  very  well. 

The  servant  is  bringing 
bread  and  wine. 

Will  you  drink  wine  or 
water  ? 


1.  Bahut    Angrez    Hindu- 

stani   sikhna    pasand 
karte  hain. 

2.  Yeh  Angrez  hamari  zu- 

ban  nahin  bol  sakta. 

3.  Kya  ap  mera  dastkhat 

parh  sakte  hain  ? 

4.  Mera  dost   thori    thori 

Angrezi  bol  sakta  hai. 

5.  Kya   turn  Angrezi   bol 

sakte  ho  ? 

6.  Jab  main  turn  se  bolta 

hun  tab  kya  turn  mujhe 
samajh  sakte  ho  ? 

7.  Yeh  zaruri  hai  ki  mera 

naukar  Angrezi  sam- 
jhe. 

8.  Main    tumhen    samajh 

sakta  hun. 

9.  Turn  ne  Angrezi  bolna 

kahan  sikha  ? 

10.  Turn  wuh  bahut  achchhi 

tarah  bolte  ho. 

11.  Naukar  roti  aur  sharab 
_  lata  hai. 

12.  Ap  sharab  piyenge   ya 

pam? 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  Phrases. 

6  literally,  when  I  you  to  speaking  am,  then  you  me  understand  able 
'     7.  lit.,  it  is  necessary  that  my  servant  English  understands. 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST. 


79 


Get  the  breakfast  ready. 
Bring  butter  and  bread. 
Give  me  a  cap  of  tea. 

This  gentleman  prefers 

coffee. 
Do  not  forget  the  sugar 

and  the  milk. 
Put   knives,  forks   and 

spoons  on  the  table. 
Salt,    mustard,    pepper 
and   vinegar    are   on 
the  table. 

Tell  the  cook  to  have 
dinner  ready  at  eight 
o'clock. 

Dinner  is  ready,  sir. 
The  soup  is  not  hot 
The  meat  is  not  cooked 

enough. 
These     vegetables     are 

very  good. 
Give  me  some  more. 
Give  me  a  clean  plate. 
What  fruits  are  in  sea- 
son now  ? 

Apples,  pears,  bananas, 
lemons. 


1.  Hazari  taiyar  karo. 

2.  Makkhan  aur  roti  lao. 

3.  Mujhe  cha  ka  ek  pyala 

do. 

4.  Yeh   sahib   kahwa    pa- 

sand  karte  hain. 

5.  Chim    aur    dudh    mat 

bhulna. 

6.  Mez  par  chhuri,  kante 

aur  chammacli  rakho. 

7.  Namak,  ra'i,  mirch  aur 

sirka  mez  par  hain. 

8.  Bavarchi   ko    kaho    ki 

ath  baje  khana  taiyar 
rakhe. 

9.  Sahib,  khana  taiyar  hai. 

10.  Shorba  garni  nahin  hai. 

11.  Gosht  kafi  nahm  paka 

hai. 

12.  Yeh    tarkariyan   bahut 

achchhi  hain. 

13.  Mujhe  kuchh  aur  do. 

14.  Mujhe  safrikabi  do. 

15.  Ajkal    kin    phalon    ka 

mausim  hai. 

16.  Seva,     nashpati,     kela, 

nibu. 


Explanatory  Notes  to  tlie  above  Phrases. 
3  literally,  me  tea  of  a  cup  give  ;    4  lit.,  this  gentleman  coffee  likes  to 
get ;    8  lit.,  to  cook  say  that  eight  struck  dinner  ready  put ;     13  idioma- 
tically MORE  is  sometimes  rendered   by  aur  (AND)  ;     16  lit.,  at  present 
which  fruits  of  season  is  ? 


80  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST. 

PROGRESSIVE    READING, 

with  Literal  Translation  and  correct  English  Rendering. 

Ek  darbari  ne  badshah  se  kaha  ki :        Huzur, 

A        courtier  king        to    said  (that) :  Your  Majesty, 

mere    pas    un    logon    ki  fihrist1  hai  jinhon  ne 

my  possession  in  those  people    of        list          is,        who 

apke  bare  men  beadbP  se  guftgu  ki  hai.    Bad- 

you       about    in      disrespect  with    talk  done        is.         The 

shah  ne  jawab  diya"  ki :    Main  tumhari  wafadari 
king  reply    gave  (that) :       I  your  loyalty 

pasand  karta  hun,  lekin  kya  turn  ne  un  logon  ke 

appreciate  doing    am,      but  (what)    you  by,  those  people     of 

ausaf  ki  flhrist1  bhi   rakhi ,  hai  ?    Jawab  diya  : 
merits    of        list          also      kept        is  ?         Answer      gave : 

Nahin,  aisa  main  ne  nahln  kiya.    Badshah  ne 
No,  so         I  not        did.          The  kins? 


jawab 
reply 

diya: 

gave  : 

To 

Then 

main    un    ke    aibon3     ki 
I              their   shortcomings    of, 

flhrist 
list 

bhi 

also 

nahm 
not 

rakhna 
to  keep 

chahta. 

wish. 

1  fihrist,  pronounce  :  fi-he-rist ;        2  beadbl,  pron.  bay-ad-bee  ; 
3  aibon,  pron.  a.i-bong. 


Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 
A  courtier  said  to  his  king  :  Your  Majesty,  I  have  a  list  of 
the  people  who  have  spoken  disrespectfully  of  you.  I  appreciate 
your  loyalty,  answered  the  king,  but  have  you  also  kept  a  list  of 
their  merits  ?  No,  I  have  not  done  so,  he  answered.  Then,  said 
the  king,  I  do  not  wish  a  list  of  their  shortcomings  to  be  kept  either. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY.  81 

Ek    mallah    Hindustan    ko   ja    raha   tha.     Ek 
A          sailor  India  to        going          was,         A 

shaihri   ne   kaha   ki  :     Samandar   ko   jane   ki 

townsman  said   (that) :  Sea  to      going    of 

tumhen  kaise  himmat  hoti  hai.    Tumhare  bap 
you  how        daring  is.  Your          father 

aur    baba    donon  samandar  men  dub  kar  mare 

and  grandfather  both  sea  in        drowned      dead 

the.    Mallah  ne  jawab  diya"  :  Ai  dost !        bata'o ; 

were.     The  sailor          reply  gave:  Oh  friend  I  just  say  (tell  me), 

tumhare    bap   kahan    mare    the  ?    Kaha :  "Wuh 
your  father    where        dead       was  ?          Said :         He 

aman    se     bistar    par    mare    the.     Mallah    ne 
peace       with        bed         in        dead      was.       The  sailor 

puchha:    Aur  tumhare  baba  wuh  kahan   mare 
asked :  And        your    grandfather  he      where         dead 

the?    Jawab  diya:    Wuh    bhi    vaise    hi    mare 

was  ?        Reply      gave  :        He      also  in  the  same  manner  dead 

the.    Mallah  ne  kaha  :  Kya  yehi  vakiya  hai  ?    To 
was.      The  sailor       said  :      What    this      fact        is  ?     Then 

bistar  par  jane  ki  tuinhari  himmat  kaise  hoti  hai 
bed          in    going  of      your  daring      how       becomes  I 


Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 
A  sailor  was  going  to  India.  A  townsman  said  (to  him) : 
How  dare  you  go  to  sea,  your  father  and  grandfather  both  having 
died  at  sea  I  The  sailor  answered  :  Well,  friend,  where  did  your 
father  die  ?  He  died  peacefully  in  his  bed,  was  the  reply.  And 
your  grandfather,  where  did  he  die  ?  He  died  in  the  same  way. 
What,  said  the  sailor,  is  that  a  fact  ?  How  then  dare  you  go  to  bed  I 


82  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE    EASY. 

TWELFTH    LESSON. 


23. — THE  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

In  forming  the  degrees  of  Comparison,  the  Adjective 
undergoes  no  change. 

The  COMPARATIVE  is  expressed  by  se  ziyada,  which 
means  '  more  than  '  (lit.  than  more).  (say  ze-yah-dah) 

The  SUPERLATIVE  is  expressed  by  sab  se  ziyada, 
which  means  '  more  than  all '  (lit.  all  than  more). 

EXAMPLES. 

this  room  is  larger  than  yeb   kamra  us   kamre  se 

that  room  ziyada  bara  hai. 

(literally,  this  room  that  room  than  more  large  is) 
his  room  is  the  largest  uska  kamra  sab  se  ziyada 

bara  hai. 
(literally,  his  room  all  than  more  large  is) 

NOTE. — Idiomatically  se  and  sab  86  are  often  used  without  the  ad- 
dition of  ziyada,  this  latter  word  being  understood, 
ziyada  may  also  be  spelt  as  zyada. 


new          naya 

na-yah 

old       burha,*  purana* 

boor-hah     pu-rah-nah 

high          uncha 

oon^-chah 


low  nicha 

nee-chah 

learned  alim 

ah-lim 

clever  hoshiyar 

hoh-she-yahr 


*burha  applies  to  living  beings  ;  purana  applies  to  things. 

40. 

1.  yeh  admi  us  admi  se  ziyada  alim  hai ;  2. 
yeh  makan  us  makan  se  ziyada  uncha  hai ; 

3.  kya  yeh  grali  us  grali  se  ziyada  purani  hai  ? 

4.  yeh  gall  shaihar  men  sab  se  ziyada  purani  hai. 

40a. 

1.  this  man  is  more  learned  than  that  man  (literally, 
this  man  that  man  than  more  learned  is)  ;  2.  this  house  is 
higher  than  that  house  (lit.,  this  hoiise  that  house  than  more 
high  is) ;  3.  is  this  street  older  than  that  street  ?  (lit.,  what, 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST.  83 

this  street  that  street  than  more  old  is)  ?  4.  it  is  the  oldest 
street  in  the  town  (lit.,  this  street  town  in  all  than  more 
old  is).  

24. — The  SUPERLATIVE  can  also  be  expressed  by  the 
repetition  of  the  adjective  with  S6  between  the  two  words  : 
the  highest  tree  uncha  se  uncha  darakht 

the  poorest  child  g&arib  se  gharlb  bachcha 

the  newest  (latest)  fashion      nayi  se  nayi  chal  (chahl)  or 

naya  se  naya  faishan  (fai-shan) 

The  method  of  repeating  the  adjective  is  also  sometimes 
nsed  to  convey  emphasis,  as  : 

very  large    bara  bara  very  low    nicha  nicha 


25. — AS ---AS  (or  SO...  AS)  can  be  expressed  in  two 
ways,  namely  : 

1.  utna  hi ...jitna  ki  (ut-nah  hee  ...  jit-nab,  ke) 

2.  vaisa  ...  jaisa  ki  (vai-sah  ...  jai-sah  ke) 

The  first  is  the  more  usual  form.     Examples  : 
as  large  as  utna  hi  bara  jitni  ki 

as  cheap  as  vaisa  sasta  jaisa  ki 

Occasionally  ki  is  omitted  after  jaisa. 

26. — GOOD  and  BAD  have,  besides  the  regular  construc- 
tion, also  an  irregular  form  of  comparison. 

GOOD    achchha  BETTEB    behtar  BEST  behtarin 

ach-ch'hah  bay'h-tar  bay'h-ta-reen 

BAD    bura  WORSE    badtar  WORST  badtarin 

bur-ah  bad-tar  bad-ta-reen 

41. 

1.  yen  kitab  utni  hi  achchhi  hai  jitni  ki 
wuh  ;  2.  meri  kitab  behtar  hai ;  3.  uski  behta- 
rin  hai ;  4.  apka  naukar  vaisa  hi  bura  hai  jaisa 
ki  mera ;  5.  mere  bha'i  ka  badtarin  hai ;  6.  yeh 
ghora  utna  hi  kimti*  hai  jitna  ki  wuh ;  7.  mere 
pas  utna  hi  rupaya  hai  jitna  ki  apke  pas ;  8. 
tumhare  dost  ke  pas  sab  se  ziyada  hai. 

*  kimti  (keem-tee),  valuable. 


84  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 

41a. 

1.  this  book  is  as  good  as  that  (book)  ;  2.  my  book  is 
better  ;  3.  his  is  the  best  ;  4.  your  servant  is  as  bad  as 
mine  ;  5.  my  brother's  (servant)  is  the  worst ;  6.  this  horse 
is  as  valuable  as  that  (horse)  ;  7.  I  have  (=in  my  posses- 
sion is)  as  much  money  as  you  have  (=in  your  possession 
is)  ;  8.  your  friend  has  the  most. 

27.— IN  COMPARISON  WITH  is  expressed  by 

ke  mukable  men    (kay  mu-kah-blay  may**) 

COMPARED  WITH  is  expressed  by 

banisbat ...  ke  (ba-nis-bat...kay)  or  ke  banisbat 

These  two  expressions  are  not  much  used  in  English,  but  they  fre- 
quently occur  in  Hindustani. 


monkey          bandar,  m. 


ban-dar 


elephant  hathl,  m. 


parrot  tota,  m. 


toh-tah 


bird  chiriya,  f. 

hah-t'hee  che-re-yah 

sharp  chalak 

kut-tah  (clever)     chah-lahk 

dear  pyara 

bil-lee  (beloved)    p'yah-rah 

When  a  general  assertion  is  made,  or  a  natural  fact  stated, 
the  English  words  IS  and  ARE  are  rendered  by  hota  hai 
or  hoti  hai  (is  being),  and  note  hain  or  hoti  hain  (are 
being).  Examples : 

Monkeys  are  clever  or  sharp.      Bandar  chalak  note  hain. 
The  Indian  loves  parrots  (=       Hindustani  ko  tota  pyara 
the  parrot).  hota  hai. 

(=by  the  Indian  the  parrot  beloved  (being)  is. 

42.  _ 

1.  Bandar  kutte*  se  ziyada  chalak  hota  hai. 
2.  Yeh  bandar  sab  se  chalak  hai.  3.  Hathi  Afri- 
ca men  Hindustan  se  ziyada  bakasrat  hote  hain. 
4.  Yeh  kutta  banisbat  us  kutte  ke  ziyada  khub- 

*  Remember  that  final  a  changes  into  e  when  followed  by  a  Preposition. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY.  85 

surat  hai.  5.  Yeh  kutta  us  kutte  ke  mukable 
men  ziyada  chalak  hai.  6.  Hinduon  ko  tote  bil- 
lion se  ziyada  pyare  hote  ham. 

42a. 

1.  The  monkey  is  sharper  than  the  dog.  2.  This  mon- 
key is  the  sharpest  (cleverest).  3.  Elephants  are  more 
abundant  in  Africa  than  in  India.  4.  This  dog  compared 
with  that  dog  is  more  beautiful.  5.  This  dog  in  comparison 
with  that  dog  is  the  sharper  (of  the  two).  6.  To  the  Hin- 
dus, parrots  are  dearer  than  cats. 


FURTHER  USEFUL  WORDS. 


each  har 

bar 

each  one  har  ek 
every  one        har  ayk 

all  sab 

sab 

a  few  chand 


both  donon 

doh-non(7 
some,  any         ko'l 


no  one  ko'l  nahin 

nobody        koh-ee  na-hee«0 

every  one         sab  ko'l 

s:ib  koh-ee 

something         kuchh 
kutch'h 

nothing       kuchh  nahin 

kutch'h  na-hecns; 

the  whole,  all    kill 

kul 

several  ka'l 


koh-ee  ka-ee 

43. 

1.  Ko'i  nahin  janta  hai  ki  wnh  kaun  hai.  2. 
Har  ek  ne  yeh  kaha,  or  har  ek  yeh  kaihta  tha. 
3.  Yeh  donon  admi  bahut  alim  hain.  4.  Ka'i  log- 
mele  men  gaye.  5.  Sab  bachchon  ke  pas  phul  the. 

43a. 

1.  Nobody  knows  who  it  is  (=no  one  knowing  is  that 
he  who  is).  2.  Every  one  said  so  (=it),  or  every  one  was 
saying  it.  3.  Both  these  men  are  very  learned.  4.  Several 
people  went  to  the  fair.  5.  All  the  children  had  flowers 
(=in  possession  of  flowers  were). 


86 


HUGOS  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 


CONVERSATIONAL     PHRASES. 


At  the  Post  Office. 

Are  there  any  letters 
for  me  ? 

Yes,  I  have  several  let- 
ters for  you. 

How  much  is  the  post- 
age to  England  ? 

At  present  the  postage 

is  two  annas. 
Give  me  twelve  stamps 

of  two  annas  each. 
Give  me  some  stamped 

envelopes. 

Also  twelve  postcards. 
I  want  to  send  a  cable 

(telegram)  to  London. 
A  telegram  to  London 

costs  ten  annas   per 

word. 
I  want  to  register  this 

letter. 
Have  you  any  change  ? 

You  can  change  money 

here. 
Will    you    do     it     for 

me  ? 


1.  Dak  khane  par. 

2.  Kya  meri  koi  chitthiafi 

hainj? 

3.  Han,  ap_  ke   liye   mere 

pas  ka'i  chitthian  hain. 

4.  Inglistan_  ka  dak  mah- 
_  sul  kya  hai  ? 

5.  Ajkal    dak    mahsul   do 

ane  hai. 

6.  Mujhe  do  do  ane  ke  ba- 

rah  tikat  do. 

7.  Mujhe    kuchh   tikatdar 

lifafe  do. 

8.  Barah  post  card  bhi. 

9-  Main     Landan    ko    tar 
bhejna  chahta  hun. 

10.  Landan  ko  tar  dene  men 

ff  lafz  das  ane  lagte 
hain. 

11.  MainJ-s  khat  ko_ragistar 

karana  chahta  hun. 

12.  Kya   tumhare  pas   rez- 

gari  hai  ? 

13.  Turn  yahan  rupaya  ba- 

dal  sakte  ho. 

14.  Kya  turn  mere  liye  yeh 

kar  doge  ? 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  Phrases. 
4  dak  mahsul=post  charges  ;        6  literally,  me  two  each  annas  of 
twelve  stamps  give  ;  do  do=two  each  ;  7  lifafe  (li-fah-fay),  envelopes ; 
12  lit.,  what  your  possession  in  change  ia  ?  rezgarl  (rayz-gah-ree)  change. 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


87 


1    must  learn    this  by 

heart. 
These  phrases  are  very 

useful. 
Write    down    all     the 

words.  [self. 

You   must  do   it  your- 
Did  you  know  that  ? 

He  ought  to  know  bet- 

ter. 

Do  not  hurry. 
There  is  time  enough. 
He  will  do  as  much  as 

he  can. 

It  is  very  hot  here. 
One   has  to    get    used 

to  the  great  heat  of 

India. 
Shall  I  come  to  see  you 

to-day  ? 
Will   you   be  at  home 

to-morrow  ? 
I    shall    be  pleased  to 

see  you. 

He  is  afraid  to  speak. 
£    want     to     ask    you 
something. 


1.  Mujhe  yeh  bazaban  yad 

kar  lena  chahiye. 

2.  Yeh  flkre  bahut  fa^ide- 

mand  hain. 

3.  Sab  lafz  likho. 

4.  Turn  kp   yeh   khud   hi 

karna  chahiye. 

5.  Kya  tum_ko  wuh  ma- 

lum  tha  ? 

6.  Usko  behtar  janana  cha- 

hiye. 

7.  Jaldi  mat  karo. 

8.  Kafivakthai. 

9.  Wuh  jitna  kar  sakta  hai 

utna  karega. 

10.  Yahan  bar!  garmi  hai. 

11.  Hindustan  ki  bar!  gar- 

mi  ka  adi  hona  parta 
hai. 

12.  Kya   aj_  main  tumhare 

pas  a'un  ? 

13.  Kya   kal  ap   ghar   par 

honge  ? 

14.  Tumhendekhkarmujhe 

khushi  hogi. 

15.  "Wuh  bolne  se  darta  hai. 

16.  Main    turn    se   _kuchh 

puchhna  chahta  hun. 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  Phrases. 
1  bazaban  yad  kar  lena,  literally,  by  tongue  learning  to  take  do 
=to  learn  by  heart  ;      2  f&'idemand  (fah-e-day-mand),  useful  ;     6  lit., 
what  to  you  that  known  was  1    7  lit.,  quickly  not  do  ;   9  lit.,  he  as  much 
as  do  can,  will  do. 


88  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST. 

PROGRESSIVE    READING, 
with  Literal  Translation  and  correct  English  Rendering. 


Purane    zaniane   men   ek    badshah    ke    darbar 

Old  times          in         a  king          of      the  court 

men    ek    vazir    tha    jiska    Khuda   men  kamil 
in  a      minister    was        who          God          in,       perfect 

yakin    tha.       Wuh    vazir     har     bure     bhale 

faith          had.  That      minister    every      bad   (or)    good 

mauke    par    yeh  kaha  karta  tha   ki  jo  kuchh 

occasion       at       this       say      used       was,   that      whatever 

Khuda    karta    hai,    wuh    hamesha    bhala'i    ke 

God  doing      is,          that        always  good 

liye    hai.      Ek   dafa     badshah    ki     ek     ufigli 

for         is.  Once  the  king        of       one       finger 

tez    chaku    se   kat-gayi.       Vazir  ne  apni  adat 

sharp    knife      by        cut  off.     The  minister    his  (own)  habit 

ke    mutabik    is    par    kaha    ki  :       Apki    ungll 

according  to  this    on        said    that  :          Your        finger 

ka     kat-jana     apke    fa'ide  ke  liye  hai.     Bad- 

of     cut  off  being        your    advantage        for      is.  The 

shah     vazir     par    bahut  khafa  hua,  aur  usko 
king    the  minister  with        very      angry  became   and       him 

apni    saltanat    se  nikal-diya.     Kuchh  dinon  ke 

his  kingdom    from     expelled.  Some        days 

bad    badshah    shikar  ke  pichhe  grhora  daurata 
after        the  king      game  after        horse         gallop- 

Lua    apni    sarhad    se    bahar    nikal   gaya    aur 
ing    his  (own)  frontier    from  beyond     crossing  went        and 


HUGO'S  HiNDUSTAKI   MADE    EASY.  89 

vaihshion  ke  hathon  men  ja-para.    Ve  vaihshi 

savages  of        hands        in         fell.          These     savages 

usko,    apne    mazhab  ke  mutabik,  kurban  karna 

him,      their  (own)  religion        according  to,        to  sacrifice 

chahte  the ;    lekin    jab    uske    badan  ko  unhon 

wanted ;  but     when      his  body  they 

ne    mulahiza  kiya    to  dekha  ki  uski  ek  ungli 
examined          then     saw       that    his    one      finger 

kam   hai,    aur  is  liye    kurbani    ke  lalk  nahin 
short      is,        and     therefore    sacrifice        of      fit  not 

hai.     Unhon    ne    usko    chhor-diya     aur     apne 

is.  They  him  released  and        their 

logon     ke     hamrah,    uski     sarhad     ke     andar 

people          in  company  of,        his        frontier  inside 

pahuiicha-diya.        Badshah     ne     apne       vazir 

reached  (=took).  The  king  his  (own)  minister 

ko  ab   yadkiya   aur  usko  bula  kar  us 

now     remembered        and        him          called  doing  him 

se    muafi    mangi    aur    usko     khub    hi     inam 
from  pardon      begged      and     to  him  many  gifts 

diye.         Vazir    ne    kaha    ki  :    Jo    kuchh  bhi- 

gave.        The  minister  said  (that)  :      Whatever        hap- 

hua    wuh    sab    bhala'i    ke    liye    tha.      Huzlir 

pened     that       all          good  for     was.    Your  Majesty 

ko     afsos    karna     thik     nahin     hai. 
grief        to  do      proper        not  is. 

Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 
In  olden  times  there  was  a  king  at  whose  court  was  a  minister 
who  had  perfect  faith  in  God.      On  every  occasion,  bad  or  good. 


90  HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 

he  used  to  say  that  whatever  God  did  was  for  good.  Once  the 
king  cut  off  one  of  his  fingers  with  a  sharp  knife.  The  minister, 
according  to  his  habit,  said  :  The  loss  of  your  finger  will  be  to 
your  advantage.  Then  the  king  was  very  angry  with  his  minister, 
and  expelled  him  from  his  kingdom. 

Some  days  after,  the  king  went  hunting,  and  as  his  horse 
galloped  beyond  the  frontier,  the  king  fell  into  the  hands  of 
savages.  In  accordance  with  their  religion,  the  savages  were 
going  to  make  a  sacrifice  of  him.  But,  on  examining  his  body, 
they  found  that  he  lacked  one  finger,  and  therefore  was  not  fit  for 
sacrifice.  They  released  him,  and  in  company  with  their  people 
took  him  back  to  within  his  own  borders. 

The  king  now  remembered  his  minister,  and  having  recalled 
him  begged  his  pardon  and  loaded  him  with  gifts.  The  minister 
said  :  Whatever  has  happened  has  been  for  the  best  and  your 
majesty  must  not  grieve  over  it. 

Ek     naujavan     ne    apni     daulat     barbad    kar 

A          young  man  his          fortune        waste        done 

ke    kaha     ki :     Mujhe    khauf1    hai    ki    mujhe 

said    (that) :        Me  fear          is    that    me  (—1) 

bhikhari    ho    kar    mama    paregraV       Ek    dost 

beggar         .       being  die    shall  be  obliged.       A     friend 

ne   jawab     diya :     Yen     to     sab     se     kharab 

reply        gaye  :        This     (then)    all        of         bad 

bat  nahin  hai.    Tumhen  bhikhari  rah  ke  zinda 

thing    not      is.  You  beggar          being        living 

raihna    parega;       yen    aur    bhi    kharab    hai. 

remain  shall  be  obliged  ;    this    more     than         bad  is. 

1  khauf,  pronounce  :  h'chawf.        2  parana,  to  fall,  to  be  obliged. 

Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 
A  young  man  who  had  wasted  his  fortune  said  :  I  fear  that  I 
shall  die  a  beggar.     That-  is  not  the  worst,  answered  a  friend. 
You  will  have  to  live  a  beggar,  that  is  far  worse. 


HUGO'S    HINDUSTANI    MADE    F.AST. 


91 


CARDINAL    NUMBERS. 

1  ek 

20  bis 

39  untalis 

ayk 

bees 

un-tah-lecs 

2  do 

21  ikkis 

40  chalis 

dob 

ik-kees 

chah-lees 

3  tin 

22  ba'is 

41  iktalis 

teen 

bah  -ees 

ik-tah-lees 

4  char 

23  te'is 

42  bi'alis 

chahr 

lay  -ees 

be-ab-lees 

5  panch 

24  chaubis 

43  tetalis 

pahnycb 

chaw-  bees 

tay-tah-lee» 

6  chhe 

25  pachchis 

44  chavalis 

ch'hay 

pat:b-chees 

cha-vah-leea 

7  sat 

26  chhabbis 

45  paintalis 

saht 

ch'hab-bees 

painv  -tab  -lees 

8  ath 

27  satta'is 

46  chlii'aUs 

aht'h 

sat-tah-ees 

ch'hee-ah-lees 

9  nau 

28  attha'is 

47  saintalis 

naw 

at-t'huh-eea 

sainp-tab-lees 

10  das 

29  untis 

48  artalis 

das 

un-tees 

ar-tah-lees 

11  gyarah 

30  tis 

49  unehas 

gyah-ra'h 

tees 

uD-cbalis 

12  barah 

31  ikatis 

50  pachas 

bah-ra'h 

ik-a-tees 

pach-abs 

13  terali 

32  battis 

51  ikyawan 

tay-ra'h 

bat-tees 

ik-yan-van 

14  chaudah 

33  tetis 

52  bawan 

chaw  -da'  h 

tay-tees 

bah-van 

15  pandrah 

34  chauntis 

53  trepan 

pany-dra'h 

chawn^-tees 

tray  -pan 

16  solah 

35  paintis 

54  chawwan 

sob-la'b 

paW-tees 

chav-van 

17  satrah 

30  chhattis 

55  pachpan 

sat-ra'h 

ch'bat-tees 

pach-pan 

18  atharah 

37  saintis 

56  chhappan 

at-  bah-ra'h 

sai-iy-tees 

ch'hap-pan 

19  unnis 

38  artis 

57  sattawan 

un-nees 

ar-tees 

sat-tah-van 

92 


HDGO*S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY". 


58  atthawan 

at-t'hah-van 

74  chauhattar     90  nawe 

chaw-hat-tar                    nav-vay 

59  unsath 

un-sat'h 

75  pichhattar     91  ikyanve 

pich-liat-tar                      ik-yabn-vay 

60  sath 

salit'h 

76  chhi'attar       92  banve 

ch'he-at-tar                       bahn-vay 

61  iksath 

lk-sat'h 

77  satattar           93  tranve 

sat-at-tar                          trahn-vay 

62  basath 

bah-sat'h 

78  athattar         94  chauranve 

at-hat-tar                          chawr-ahn-vay 

63  tresath 

tray-sat'h 

79  unasi              95  pachanve 

uii-ah-see                           pach-ahn-vay 

64  chaufisath 

cha.w/i<j-sat'h 

80  assi                 96  chhi'anve 

as-see                                 ch'be-ahn-vay 

65  painsatli 

painjr-sat'h 

81  ikyasi             97  satanve 

ik  -yah  -see                        sat-ahn-vay 

66  chhi'asath 

ch'hee-ah-sat'h 

82  bi'asi               98  athanve 

be-ah-see                          at'h-ahn-vay 

67  sarsath 

sar-sat'h 

83  tirasi              99  ninanve 

tir-ah-see                          nin-ahn-vay 

68  arsath 

ar-sat'h 

84  chaurasi       100  sau 

chaw-rah-see                    saw 

69  unhattar 

un-hat-tar 

85  pichasi          200  do  sau 

pich-ah-see                       doh  saw 

70  sattar 

sat-tar 

86  chhi'asi         300  tin  sau 

ch'he-ah-see                     teen  saw 

71  ikahattar 

ik-a-hat-tar 

87  satasi          1,000  hazar 

sat-ah-see                         ha-zahr 

72  "ba'liattap 

ba-hat-tar 

88  athasi         2,000  do  hazar 

at'h-ah-see                       doh  ha-zahr 

73  ti'hattar 

te-hat-tar 

89  navasi     100,000  lakh  (lac) 

nav-ah-see                         lahk'h 

100,000  rupees*      6k  lakh  TUpaye  (ayk  lahk'h  ru-pa-yay) 
1,000,000  das  lakh  (das  lahk'h) 

100  lacs  or  10,000,000     6k  CrOP  (ayk  crohr) 
*  Tliere  are  sixteen  annas  to  the  rupee. 


HUGO  S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


93 


ORDINAL    NUMBERS. 


1st    paihla  or  awwal 

7th    satwan 

pai'h-lah    av-val 

saht-vahn<7 

2nd    dusra 

8th    athwan 

doos-rah 

aht'h-vahn« 

3rd    tisra 

9th    nawan 

tees-rah 

4th    chautha 

chaw-t'hah 

10th    daswan 

das-vahn<r 

5th    panchwan 

llth    gyarahwan 

6th    chhatha  or 

gyah-rah-vah?ifl 

chhathwan 

12th    barahwan 

ch'hat-hah,     ch'hat'h-vahnp                          b  ah-ra'h-vahnfl 

21st        ikklswan    (ik-kees-vahnj) 

33rd        tetlswan    (tay-tees-vah?*) 

46th        chhiallswan    (ch'he-ah-lees-vah»v) 

55th         pachpanwan     (pach-pan-vahn^) 

72nd        bahattarwan    (ba-hat-tar-vahn?) 

Ordinal_  Numbers  take  Gender  and  Number.  Those 
ending  in  a  follow  the  ordinary  rule  of  ka,  ke,  kl  (see 
page  19),  thus  : 

the  first  man  paihla  admi 

the  first  woman  paihll  aurat 

the  first  people  paihle  log 

To  form  the  MA.SCULTNE  PLURAL  of  the  Ordinals  end- 
ing in  wan,  change  wan  into  wen,  thus  : 

panchwan  (5th)    becomes    panchwen 
chhathwan  (6th)       „        chhathwen 

To  form  the  FEMININE  (SINGULAR  and  PLURAL)  of  the 
Ordinals  ending  in  wan,  change  wan  into  Win,  thus  : 
chhathwan  (6th)    becomes    chhathwin 
satwan  (7th)  „          satwln,  and  so  on. 


94 


HUGOS   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST. 


COLLECTIVE    AND    FRACTIONAL    NUMBERS. 


a  couple          ek  jora 

ayk  jor-ah 

a  dozen  ek  darjan 

ayk  dar-jan 

a  score  bis 

bees 

single  akela 

a-kay-lab 

double  dugrna 

dug-nah 

threefold  tigoina 

te-gun-ah 

fourfold          chaugruna 

chaw-gun-ah 

manifold       bahut  gruna 

ba-hut  gun-ali 

once  ek  dafa 

ayk  da-fab 

twice  do  dafa 

dob  da-fab 

three  times       tin  dafa" 
teen  da-fah 

many  times      bahut  dafa 

ba-but  da-fab 

the  first  time    paihll  dafa" 
pai'b-lee  da-fab 

the  second  time  _ 

dusri  dafa" 

doos-ree  da-fab 

the  third  time 

tisre  bar  or  dafa 

tees-ray  bahr,   da-fab 

the  first  one      awwal 
av-val 


the  mHdle  one     majhla 
maj'h-lah 

the  last  one      akhiri 
ah'cb-e-ree 

firstly  paihle  or 

awwal 

pai'h-lay,  av-ral 

secondly  dusre 

doos-ray 

thirdly  tisere 

tee-say-ray 

one  third  ek  tiha?! 

ayk  te-hah-ee 

two  thirds         do  tiha'l 
dob  te-hah-ee 

a  quarter       ek  chautha'l 

(fourth  part)     ayk  chaw-t'hah-ee 

a  half  adha 

ahd-hah 

one  and  a  half 

dyorha  or  derh 

dyohr-hah,  dayr'h 

two  and  a  half        dha'i 
d'hab-ee 

three  and  a  half  _ 

sarbe  tin 

sahr-hay  teen 

four  and  a  half  _ 

sarhe  char 

sahr-hay  chabr 

and  so  on,  by  putting  sarhe 
(HALF)  before  the  Cardinal 
Number. 


HUGO  S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EA..SY. 


95 


PERIODS    OF    TIME. 


a  second          ek  sekand 
or  secand 

ayk  saj-kanyd 

a  minute         ek  minat 

ayk  min-at 

an  hour  ek  ghanta 

ayk  g'han-tah 

a  day  ek  din 

ayk  din 

a  week  ek  hafta 

ayk  haf-tah 

a  fortnight  ek  pakhwara 

ayk  pak'h-vah-rah 

a  month          ek  mahina 

ayk  ma-hee-nah 

ek  sal 


a  year 


ayk  sahl 


a  century          ek  sadl 

ayk  sa-dee 


to-day 

ahdj 
to-morrow 


kal 


aj 
kal 


yesterday          kal 
kal 

the  next  day     agla  din 
a-glah  din 

next  week       agla  hafta 

a-glah  haf-tah 

next  month  agla  mahina 

a-glah  ma-hee-nah 

next  year          agla  sal 

a-glah  sahl 


a  week  ago  ek  hafta  hua 

ayk  haf-tah  hu-ah 

a  month  ago 

ek  mahina  hua 

ayk  ma-hee-nah  hu-ah 

a  year  ago        ek  sal  hua 

ayk  sahl  hu-ah 

last  week      akhiri  hafta 

ah'ch-e-ree  haf-tah 

last  month 

akhiri  mahina 

ah'ch-e-ree  ma-hee-nah 

last  year  akhiri  sal 

ah'ch-e-ree  sahl 

this  morning       aj  SUbah 
ahdj  su-ba'h 

this  afternoon 

aj  se  paihar 

ahdj  say  pai-har 

this  evening     aj  sham 

ahdj  shahm 

to-night          aj  rat 

ahdj  raht 
to-morrow  morning 

kal  subah 

kal  su-ba'h 

to-morrow  evening 

kal  sham 

kal  shahm 

the  day    after\ 

to-morrow     (parSOfi, 
the  day  beforef    par-soi* 

yesterday      / 


96  HUGO'S    HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


HOURS    OP    THE    DAY. 


what  is  the  time  ?  kya  vakt  hai  ? 

kyah  vakt  hai 

it  is  one  o'clock  ek  baja  hai* 

ayk  ba-jah  hai 

it  is  half  past  one  derh  baja  hai 

dayr'h  ba-jah  hai 

it  is  two,  three,  four  o'clock      do,  tin,  char,  baje  hain 

doh,  teen,  chahr.  ba-jay  hain? 

it  is  a  quarter  to  three  paune  tin  baje  hain 

paw-nay  teen  ba-jay  hain<r 

it  is  a  quarter  past  three  sava  tin  baje  hain 

sa-vah  teen  ba-jay  hain^r 

it  is  ten  minutes  to  four 

char  bajne  men  das  minat  hain 

chahr  baj-nay  maynp  das  min-at  bain? 

it  is  five  minutes  past  four 

char  baj  kar  panch  minat  haia 

chahr  badj  kar  pahnjch  min-at  hain? 

at  what  time  ?  kis  vakt  ? 

kis  vakt? 

at  ten  o'clock  das  baje 

das  ba-jay 

at  half  past  ten  sadhe  das  baje 

sahd-hay  das  ba-jay 

at  midday  do  paihar  ko 

doh  pai-har  koh 

at  midnight  adhi  rat  ko 

ahd-hee  raht  koh 

the  clock  is  slow  g-hari  sust  hai 

g'ha-ree  sust  hai 

the  clock  is  fast  ghari  tez  hai 

g'ha-ree  tayz  hai 

the  clock  has  stopped  ghari  band  ho  gayi  hai 

g'ha-ree  ban^d  hoh  ga-yee  hai 
"literally,  one  struck  is,  two  struck  are,  and  so  on. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY.  97 


THIRTEENTH    LESSOR. 


The  use  of  the  pronoun  apna,  which  means  OWN  and 
SELF,  often  causes  difficulty  to  foreigners,  as  it  is  liable  to 
be  confused  with  the  personal  pronoun  ap  (you).  The  fol- 
lowing explanations  will  make  its  use  clear. 


28. — apna  (meaning  OWN)  is  declined  like  an  adjec- 
tive, a  :reeing  in  gender  and  number  with  the  person  or 
thing  owned,  according  to  the  rules  of  ka,  ke,  kl,  thus  : 
apna,  apne,  apni.  It  implies  ownership  or  possession, 
as  :  my  own,  his  own,  their  own,  etc. 

EXAMPLES. 

I  read  MY  (own)  book  main  apni  kitab  pahrta  hufi 

he  sells  HIS  (own)  horse  wuh  apna  ghora  bechta  hai 

we  have  seen  OUR  (own)        ham  ne  apne  bete  ko  dekha 
son  hai 

have   you   written    TouK        kya  turn  ne  apna  khat  likha 
(own)  letter  ?  hai  ? 

29.— When  HIS,  HER,  THEIR,  do  not  imply  OWN,  but 
refer  to  some  one_eise,  then  these  pronouns  must  NOT  be 
rendered  by  apna  but  by  the_ordinary  possessive  pronouns 
uska,  uske,  uski,  and  unka,  unke,  unki.  Examples  : 

he  reads  his  (some  one  else's)         wuh  uski  kitab  parhta  hai 

book 
they   read  their  (other  peo-         ve  unki  kitaben  pahrte  hain 

pie's)  books 

30. — SELF  and  SELVES  added  to  pronouns,  as  MYSELF, 
OURSELVES,  etc.,  are  rendered  by  apne  or  apne  ap  (un- 
declined).  Examples  : 

I  bought  this  book  for  my-        main  ne  yeh  kitab  apne  liye 

self  kharldi 

they  bought   these  horses        unhon   ne  yeh    ghore   apne 
for  themselves  liye  kharide 

he  killed  himself  tts  ne  aPne  ko  mar  dala  °* 

oe  apne  ap  ko  mar  dala 


98 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


31. — When  SELF  or  SELVES  merely  serve  to  emphasize 
the  subject,  these  pronouns  are  generally  rendered  by 
khud  (h'chud),  as  in  : 

I  myself  did  it  main  ne  khud  ise  kiya 

you  yourself  have  said  it  apne  khud  yeh  kaha  tha 

44. 

1.  Ram  ne  apna  ghora  becha.  2.  Ram  ne  apne 
malik  ka  ghora  becha.  3.  Krishna  ne  yeh  chi- 
zen  apne  liye  kharidm.  4.  Usne  yeh  apne  dost 
ke  liye  kharidm.  5.  Apna  kam*  karo.  6.  Gharib 
admi  ko  apne  rupaye  men  se  do.  7.  Ham  ne 
khud  yeh  dekha  tha.  8.  Admi  ne  khud  yeh  likha 
tha.  9.  Wuh  khud  vahan  nahm  gayi  thi. 

*  kam  (kahm),  work. 

44a. 

1.  Ram  sold  his  (own)  horse.  2.  Ram  sold  his  master's 
horse.  3.  Krishna  bought  these  things  for  himself.  4.  He 
bought  them  for  his  friend.  5.  Do  your  own  work.  6.  Give 
of  your  (own)  money  to  the  poor  man.  7.  We  ourselves 
saw  it.  8.  The  man  himself  wrote  it.  9.  She  did  not  go 
(there)  herself. 


USEFUL  INTERROGATIVE  WORDS. 

HTHBN  ? 

tVHERE  ? 
WHY  ? 

kab? 

kab 

kahan  ? 

ka-hahny 

kyun? 

WHO  ?           |  kaun*  ?  or 
WHICH  ?         I  kis  ? 

kawn    kis 

HOW  ?            kaisat  ? 

(in  what  manner)        kai-sah 

WHAT? 

kya? 

kyah 

HOW  MUCH 
HOW  MANY 

?  Ikitnat  ? 

?  )     kit-nuh 

*  kaun  followed  by  a  preposition  becomes  kis. 
t  kaiaa  and  kitna  take  gender  and  number,  thus  :    kaisa,  kaise, 
kaisl,  and  kitna,  kitne,  kitnl. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI    MADE   EASY.  99 

HOW  LONG  ?  kab  tak  ? 

(future,  long  period)  kah  tak 

HOW  LONG  ?  kitni  der  tak  ? 

(future,  short  period)  kit-nee  dayr  tak 

HOW  LONG  ?  kitni  muddat  ? 

(past,  long  period)  kit-nee  mud-dat 

HOW  LONG  ?  kitm  der  se  ? 

(past,  short  period)  kit-nee  dayr  say 

These  expressions  are  sometimes  used  indiscriminately  in  denoting 
tense  and  time. 

Interrogation  can  also  be  expressed  by  tone  of  voice,  generally  by 
•mphasizing  the  last  word  of  the  sentence,  as  : 

Don't  you  know  ?  Turn  nahln  jante  ? 

45. 

1.  wuh  sahib  kaun  hai  ?  2.  ap  un  se  kab  mile 
the  ?  3.  turn  us  se  kalian  mile  the  ?  4.  ap  kya 
chahte  hain  ?  5.  ap  ko  wuh  kaisa  pasand  aya  ? 
().  ap  isko  kaise  karte  hain  ?  7.  ap  ne  iske  liye 
kitne  rupaye  diye  ?  8.  ap  yahan  kab  se  hain  ? 
9.  ap  yahan  kab  tak  raiheng-e  ?  10.  ap  yahan  kitni 
der  se  is  kamre  men  hain  ?  11.  ap  yahan  kitni 
der  tak  hong-e  ?  12.  ap  Hindustan  men  kitni  mud- 
dat tak  honge  ?  13.  ap  ne  isko  kyun  nahin  kiya 
hai  ?  14.  ap  jante  the  ?  15.  wuh  gaya  tha  ? 

45a. 

1.  who  is  that  gentleman  ?  2.  when  did  you  meet 
them  ?  3.  where  did  you  meet  him  ?  4.  what  do  you 
want  ?  5.  how  do  you  like  that  ?  6.  how  do  you 
do  this  ?  7.  how  many  rupees  did  you  pay  for  it  ?  8.  how 
long  have  you  been  (residing)  here  ?  9.  how  long  will  you 
be  here  (residing)  ?  10.  how  long  have  you  been  here  (in 
this  room)  ?  11.  how  long  will  you  be  here  (in  the  room)  ? 
12.  how  long  have  you  been  or  will  you  be  in  India  ?  13.  why 
have  you  not  done  it  ?  14.  did  you  know  (=you  know 
vlid)  ?  15.  did  he  go  (=he  go  did)  ? 


100  HUGO'S  HJND08TANI  MADE  EAST. 

32.— THE  USE  OF  sa,  se,  si. 

1. — As  Adjectives,  sa,  se,  SI  (according  to  gender  ami 
aumber),  mean  LIKE,  SIMILAR,  TO,  as  : 

mera  sa  beta  a  son  like  mine  (lit.  my  like  son) 

mere  se  bete  sons  like  mine  (lit.  my  like  sons) 

merl  Si  betl  a  daughter  like  mine  (lit.  my  like  daughter) 

meri  si  betiafl  daughters  like  mine  (lit.  my  like  daughters) 

2. — sa,  S6  or  SI,  can  also  be  used  with  other  Adjec- 
tives, as : 

safed  si  bakarl  a  goat  like  white 

lamba  sa  per  a  tree  like  tall 

3. — 86  as  Preposition  (invariable)  means  FROM  or  WITH. 
jangal  se  lakarl  lao          bring  wood  from  the  jungle 
main  namak  se  rotl        I  salt  with  bread  eat 
khata  nun 

4._With  verbs  like  kaihna  (to  say),  bolna  (to  speak), 
86  also  means  TO,  as  : 

main  ne  bha'I  se  kaha    I  said  to  my  brother 

5. — With  passive  verbs,  S6  means  BY,  as  : 

yeb  kam  naukar  se  kiya  jaega 
this  work    servant    by  done  shall  be 

6. — In  the  comparison  of  adjectives,  se  stands  for  THAN. 

wuh  apne  bha'I  se  ziyada  hoshiyar  hai 
he      his  brother  than  more      clever         is 


33. — In  Hindustani,  there  is  no  indirect  narration. 
Every  quotation  is  prefixed  by  ki,  THAT.  For  instance 
'  he  said  he  would  do  it '  should  be  rendered  thus  :  he  said 
that :  I  will  do  it.  Examples  : 

the  man  said  he  will  let  adml  ne  kaha  ki  :  main  apko 

you  know  itla  dunga 

my  father  told  me  to  go  mere  bap  ne  mujh  se  kaha 

home  ki  :  ghar  ja'o 

he  said  he  was  going  to  us  ne  kaha  ki  :     main    In- 

England  glistan  jata  hun 


HUGOS   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


101 


CONVERSATIONAL    PHRASES. 


When  you  have  writ- 
ten that  letter,  show 
it  to  me. 

It  is  finished  now. 

Here   it    is,   what    do 
you  think   of   it  ? 

Do    not    speak  to  me 

while  I  am  writing. 
Do  you    want   any    of 

these  books  ? 
I   want    two    or  three 

books. 
Go  to  the  bazaar  to  buy 

them. 
When   you   have  done 

reading,     place     the 

book  on  the  shelf. 
I  must  have  seen  him 

somewhere. 
I      cannot      remember 

where    I    have   seen 

him. 
This  is  a  nice    house, 

is  it  yours  ? 
That  house  is    not  as 

nice  as   mine. 


1.  Jab  turn  yeh  khat  likh 

chukp,_  tab      mujhe 
dikhana. 

2.  Yeh  ab  khatm  ho  gaya. 

3.  Yeh  lijiye,  jip  iske  bare 

men    kya    samajahte 
hain? 

4.  Jab   main    likhun,    tab 

mujh  se  mat  bolo. 

5.  Kya  turn  in  kitabon  men 

se  ko'i  chahte  ho  ? 

6.  Main^  do  ya  tin  kitaben 

chahta  nun. 

7.  TTnko_kharidne  ke  liye 

bazar  jao. 

8.  Jab  tum_parh  chuko  tab 

kitab  almari  men  rakh 
dena. 

9.  Main  usko  kahm  na  ka- 

hin  dekha  hog;a._ 

10.  Mujhe  yad  nahm  ata  ki 

main_  ne    use    kahan 
dekha. 

11.  Yeh_umda  makan  hai 

kya  yeh  apka  hai  ? 

12.  Wuh  ghar  utna  achchha 

nahm     hai   jitna    ki 
mera. 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  Phrases. 
2  khatm  ho  gaya=finished  been  gone  ;    '  to  finish  '  is  expressed  by 
khatm  hona  or  chukna  :       3  lit.,  this  take  please  you  it  about  what 
understanding  are  ;     9  kahln  na  kahin,  idiomatic  for  '  somewhere.' 


102 


HUUO'S    HINDUSTANI   MADE    EAST. 


T  receive  one  hundred 

rupees  a  month. 
Are  you  satisfied  with 

one  hundred  rupees  ? 

One  cannot  do  anything 

with  such  a  small  sum. 

How     much     do     you 

want  ? 
How  much  money  have 

you  lost  ? 
I  have  lost  three  hun- 

dred  rupees. 
They  are  losing  money. 

He  is  gaining  (making) 

money. 
He  has  wasted  his 

money. 
You  have  made  good 

use  of  your  money. 

How  much  a  day  does 
this  labourer  earn  ? 

Three    or    four    annas 

a  day. 
He  only   receives    five 

annas  a  day. 
He  gives  me  less  money 

than  he  gives  him. 


1.  Mujhe  sau_rupaya  ma- 

hina  milta  hai. 

2.  Kya  turn  sau  rupaye  se 

khush  ho  ? 

3.  Itni   chhoti    rakam    se 

kuchh  nahm  ho  sakta. 

4.  Tumhen  kitna  chahiye  ? 

5.  Turn    ne   kitna  rupaya 

khoya  hai  ? 

6.  Main  ne  tin  sau  rupaye 

khoe  hain. 

7.  Ve    rupaya    kho    rahe 

hain. 

8.  Wuh  rupaya  kama  raha 

hai. 

9.  Us  ne  apna  rupaya  bar- 

bad  kar  diya  hai. 

10.  Turn  ne  apne  rupaye  ka 

achohha  istemal  kiya 
hai. 

11.  Yeh  mazdur  fl  roz  kit- 

na kamata  hai  ? 

12.  Tin  ya  char  ane  roz. 
Use  sirf  panch  ane  roz 

milte  hain. 
Wuh  mujhe  uske  banis- 
14<      bat  kam  rupaya  deta 
hai. 


13. 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  Phrases. 
B  to  lose  khona,  past  participle  khoya  ;  literally,  you  by  how  much 
money  lost  is  ?  9  lit.,  him  by  his  money  waste  done  given  is  ;    10  lit.,  you 
by  your  money  of  good  use  done  is  ;    11  kamana,  to  earn,  to  gain. 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI    MADE    EASY.  108 

PROGRESSIVE    READING, 
with  Literal  Translation  and  correct  English  Rendering. 


Ek    zalim    badshah    yen    janana    chahta    tha. 

A    tyrannical        king          this        to  know  wanted 

ki    mere    bare  men,    meri  raiyat  ki    kya    ral 
that      me  abont,  my    subjects  of    what  opinion 

hai.       Is    gharaz    se    us    ne    ek    kashtkar    se 

is.  This  purpose    with    he  one        farmer      from 

jo  .ek    gaofi.    ko    ja    raha     tha    puchha     ki : 

who    a    village      to  going  was          asked     (that) : 

Badshah  ke  mutallik  kya    tumhari    nTi    hai? 

The  king        of    concerning,    what        your       opinion    is  ? 

Us  ne   jawab    diya    ki  :    Wuh  bara  zalim  hai 
He  reply      gave  (that) :      He      great      tyrant      is 

aur     us     mefi     insaf   ka    nam    o    nishan    bhi 

and       him         in,      justice      of      name    and    trace        even 

nahin    hai.    Badshah  ne  kaha  kya    turn  nahifl 

not  is.         The  king  said      what      you          not 

jante     ki    jis    se    turn    bol    rahe    ho    wuh    ia 

know      that     whom    with     you      speaking     are        he    this 

mulk    ka    badshah    hai  ?     Kashtkar  ne  jawab 
country    of  king  is  ?         The  farmer  reply 

mefl    kaha    ki    wuh    shakhs    jo     badshah     se 

in  said    that     the        person       who        the  king    with 

mukhatib    hai,    dimagh    ki    kamzori    ka    shl- 

addressing          is,  brain       of        weakness      of        vio- 


104  HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASi'. 

kar  hai,  aur  vaktan-favaktan  do  paihar 
till)  is,  and  occasionally  noon 

men  hararat  ki  ziyadti  se  behavas  ho  ja- 
in  (at)  temperature  of  excess  from  out  of  senses  be- 
ta hai.  Badshah  yen  sun  kar  bahut 
comes.  The  king  this  hear  doing  much 

khush  hua  aur  hansta  hua  shaihar 
amused  became  and  laughing  city 

ko       bapis       chala       graya. 

to  back  away  went. 


Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 

A  tyrannical  king  was  curious  to  find  out  what  his  subjects 
thought  of  him.  For  this  purpose  he  asked  a  farmer  who  was 
on  his  way  to  a  village  what  his  opinion  of  the  king  was.  He 
answered  that  the  king  was  a  great  tyrant  and  that  there  was  no 
trace  of  justice  in  him. 

The  king  said  :  Do  you  not  know  that  he  with  whom  you 
are  speaking  is  the  king  of  this  country  ? 

The  farmer  answered  that  the  person  whom  the  king  was 
addressing  suffered  from  weakness  of  the  brain  and  occasionally 
at  noon,  through  the  excessive  heat,  went  out  of  his  senses. 

When  the  king  heard  this,  he  was  much  amused,  and  went 
back  to  the  city  laughing. 


Ek    machhue1    ne    ek    dafS    ek    bahut    chhotl 
A         fisherman  one      time      one       very  small 

machhli      pakari.        Us    chhote    makhluk    ne 

fish  caught.  This      little  creature 

ro    kar    kaha     ki :     Mujhe    pakarne    se    kya 
crying  said      (that) :        Me  catch        from    what 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY.  105 

fa'ida  ?       Mujhe    barhne    ke    liye    vakt    do 
use  ?  Me  to  grow  for        time  give. 

Mujhe  darya  men  bapis  phenk'  dijiye.  Jab 
Me  river  in  back  throwing  do  please.  When 

main  aur  bari  ho  ja?un,  tab  mujhe  pa- 
I  more  big  become,  then  me 

karna.  Machhue  ne  jawab  diya  ki :  Jha- 
catch.  The  fisherman  by,  answer  given  (that) :  Strug- 
game*  se  kuchh  fa'ida  nahin  hai.  Ab  to 
gh'ng  of  any  use  not  is.  Now  (then) 

tu    mere    hath    men    hai,    tujhe    meri    tokri 

thou    my        hand        in        art,        thou         my         basket 

men  jana  hoga.  Aj  sham  meri  kar- 
in  go  must.  To-day  evening  my  frying- 

ha'i  men  jana  hoga,  aur  main  tujhe  khane 
pan  in  go  must,  and  I  thee  supper 

men          kha'UBLg'a.  J  machhue,  pron.  match-ha-ay ; 

=in  (at)      shall  eat.  2  P^enk,         „     p'hay»»k  ; 

3jhagarne,     „     j'ba-gar-nay. 


Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 
A  fisherman  once  caught  a  very  small  fish.  The  little 
creature  cried  :  What  is  the  use  of  catching  me  ?  Gfre  me  time 
to  grow.  Please  throw  me  back  into  the  river,  and  catch  me 
when  I  am  bigger.  The  fisherman  answered  :  Struggling  is  no 
use,  I  have  thee  now  in  my  hand,  and  into  my  basket  thou  muse 
go.  This  evening  thou  goest  into  my  frying-pan,  and  I  shall  eat 
thee  for  my  supper. 

H.S.— 4* 


106  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


FOURTEENTH    LESSON. 


COMPOUND    VERBS. 

The  use  of  so-called  Compound  Verbs  is  an  important 
feature  in  the  Hindustani  language.  In  the  Conversational 
Phrases  and  the  Reading  Exercises  in  this  text-book,  these 
compounds  frequently  occur,  and  are  as  far  as  possible  ex- 
plained and  literally  translated,  so  that  the  student,  by  this 
time,  will  be  fairly  familiar  with  them. 

Occasionally,  such  Compounds  are  met  with  either 
hyphened  or  written  in  one  word,  but  the  more  usual 
method  is  to  write  them  as  separate  words. 


34. — When  two  verbs  are  compounded,  the  first  (or 
principal)  verb  is  used  in  the  stem  form  only,  and  the 
second  (or  auxiliary)  verb  has  the  conjugation.  The  verb 
used  as  an  auxiliary  entirely  loses  its  own  meaning 
and  merely  serves  to  intensify  or  modify  the  meaning  of 
the  stem  to  which  it  is  joined. 

EXAMPLES. 

baithna,_to  sit  baith  jana,_to  sit  down 

phenkna,  to  throw          phenk  dena,  to  throw  away 

khana  to  eat  khlfalna}to  eat  up 

torna,  to  break  tor  dalna,  to  break  in  pieces 

kholna,  to  open  khol  dena,  to  open  up 

marna,  to  kill  mar  dalna,  to  kill  outright 

glrna,  to  fall  gir  parna,  to  fall  down 

katna,  to  cut  kat  dalna,  to  cut  up 

NOTB. — dalna  literally  means  :  to  throw  or  to  put. 

35. — A  large  number  of  Compound  Verbs  are  formed 
by  prefixing  Nouns,  Adjectives,  etc^to  the  verb._  In  such 
cases,  the  verbs  karna  (to  do),  hona  (to  be),  dena  (to  give), 
lena  (to  take),  and  a  few  others  are  generally  used  as 
auxiliarv  Verbs. 


HUGOS   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


107 


EXAMPLES. 


sawar,  horseman 

shikar,  game 
udhar,  loan 

band,  closed,  shut 
khatm,  finished 


raham,  kindness 
sabr,  patience 

"  Idiomatically,  '  done,'  '  finished, 

it  is  done 
he  has  done  speaking 


sawar  hona,_to  ride 
shikar  karna   \. 
shik_ar  kh_elna|tohunt 
udhar  lena,  to  borrow 
udhar  dena,  to  lend 
band  karna,  to  shut  up 
khatm  karna,  to  finish 
khatm  ho  chukna,* 

to  have  finished 

raham  karna, 

to  show  kindness 
sabr  karna, 

to  have  patience 

is  expressed  by  chuka,  as  : 

ho  chuka 

wuh  bol  chuka  hai 


A  FURTHER  LIST  OP  FREQUENTLY  OCCURRING 

COMPOUNDS. 
yad  karna,  to  remember,       kharch  karna,  to  spend 


to  learn 
yad  ana,  to  remember, 

to  recollect 
yadkarana), 
yad  dilana_Jto  remmd 
yad  rakhna, 

to  keep  in  mind 
zikr  karna,  to  mention, 

to  speak  of 

phir  ana',  to  come  back 
phir  jana,  to  go  back 
laut  ana,  to  return 
kabnl  karna,  to  accept 
nikal  dena,  to  torn  out, 
to  expel 


karz  dena,  to  lend 
karz  lena,  to  borrow 
itbar  karna,  to  trust 
le  ana^  to  fetch 
le  jana,  to  take  away 
khatm  karna      Ho 
khatm  kar  dena)  finish 
shuru  karna,  to  begin 
let  jana,  to  lie  dowr 
so  jana,  to  go  to  sleep* 
talab  karna,  to  send  for 
hasil  karna,  to  get,  obtain 
hasil  kar  dena,  to  procure 
barbad  karna,  to  waste 


108  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 

46. 

1.  darvaza  khol  do ;  2.  khirki  band  kar  do ; 
3.  yahan  let  ja'o ;  4.  so  ja'o  ;  5.  in  chizon  ko  le 
ja'o ;  G.  mere  liye  eli  botal  sliarab  le  a'o  ;  7. 
isko  yad  karo  ;  8.  isko  yad  raklio  ;  9.  apna  ru- 
paya  mat  barbad  karo  ;  10.  gliarib  par  raham 
karo ;  11.  sabr  karna  achchha  hai. 

46a. 

1.  open  the  door  ;  2.  shut  the  window  ;  3.  lie  down 
here  ;  4.  go  to  sleep  ;  5.  take  away  these  things  ;  6.  fetch 
me  a  bottle  of  wine  ;  7.  learn  this  ;  8.  keep  that  in  mind  ; 
9.  do  not  waste  your  money  ;  10.  show  kindness  to  the 
poor ;  11.  it  is  well  to  have  patience. 


promise  vada 


vah-dah 


present,  gift      tllhfa" 


tu'h-fah 


knowledge        ilm 


ilm 


robber  daku 

dah-kuh 

Frenchman       FarasiSl 

fah-rah-see-see 

Russian  Rusi 

roo-see 


_ 

1.  turn  ko  ekdam  bapis  phir  jana  chahiye  ; 
2.  wuh  bahut  jaldi  laut  aya  hai ;  3.  kya  turn 
ko  yeh  yad  nahm*  ata  ?  4.  main  tumhara  tuhfa 
kabul  karta  hun ;  5.  mujhe  tumhen  apne  vade 
ki  yad  dilani  hai ;  6.  kya  turn  ne  apni  chitthi 
khatm  kar  di  ?  7.  shuru  se  shuru  karo. 

*  The  Negative  is  usually  placed  between  the  two  component  parts 
of  the  verb. 

47a. 

1.  you  must  go  back  at  once  ;  2.  he  has  returned  too 
soon  ;  3.  don't  you  remember  (recollect)  it  ?  4.  I  accept 
your  present  ;  5.  1  have  to  remind  you  of  your  promise ; 
6.  have  you  finished  your  letter  ?  7.  begin  at  the  beginning. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   BABY.  109 

48. 

1.  ve  kyun  sliuru  nahiii  karte  ?  2.  kya  turn 
shuru  karoge  ?  3.  main  tumnare  liye  wuli  ha- 
sil  kar  dunga  ;  4.  nmjhe  kuchh  rupaya  karz  do ; 
5.  rupaya  karz  mat  lo ;  6.  larkian  ilm  hasil 
karti  ham ;  7.  badshali  ne  daku  ko  mulk  se 
nikal  diya;  8.  Farasisi  ne  Rusi  se  apne  safar 
ka  zikr  kiya. 

4Sa. 

1.  why  don't  they  begin  ?  2.  will  you  begin  ?  3.  I 
will  get  (procure)  it  for  you  ;  4.  lend  me  some  money  ; 
5.  do  not  borrow  money  ;  6.  the  girls  obtain  knowledge  ; 
7.  the  king  expelled  the  robber  from  the  country  ;  8.  the 
Frenchman  spoke  to  the  Russian  of  his  journey. 


36.— PASSIVE  VERBS. 

The  passive  form  of  verbs  is  very  little  used  in  Hindu- 
stani _  When  required  it  is  produced  by  adding  the  tenses 
of  jana  (to  go)  to  the_Present  Participle  of  the  Verb.  In 
this  consti-uction  jana  (to  go)  answers  to  the  English  usage 
of  *  to  be '  to  express  the  Passive  Voice.  For  instance  : 

from  dena(to  give)  comes  the  passive  form  diya  jana  (to  be  given) 
„     dekhna  (to  see)      „  „  dekha  jana  (to  be  seen) 

The  verb  jana  only  is  conjugated,  but  the  Participle  as  well 
as  jana  must  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  subject. 

ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

I  give  money,  main  rupaya  deta    money  is  °riven  by  me,  mujh  se 
hun  rupaya  diya  jata  hai 

Other  Verbs  are  also  idiomatically  used  to  form  the 
Passive,  as  : 

malum  hona,  to  be  known        mar  khana,  to  be  beaten 
shikast  khana,  to  be  defeated 

Sometimes  a  slight  change  in  the  verb  serves  the  same 
purpose,  as :        pltna,  to  beat  pitna,  to  be  beaten 


110 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE    EAST. 


CONVERSATIONAL     PHRASES. 


You    have    a    faithful 

servant. 
How  long  has  he  been 

with  you  ? 
He  has  been  with  me 

from  childhood. 
He  is  a  great  comfort 

to  me. 
He  does  all  the  work 

and  never  complains. 


When  he  is  old  I 
support  him. 


shall 


In  India  people  are 
good  to  their  ser- 
vants. 

They  are  not  over- 
worked. 

They  easily  pick  up  the 
English  language. 

Has  that  been  your  ex- 
perience also  ? 

I  have  not  been  here 
long  enough  yet. 


1.  Tumhare  pas  ek  wafa~- 

dar  naukar  hai. 

2.  Wuh  tumhare  pas  kitne 

din  se  hai  ? 

3.  Wuh  mere  pas  bachpan 

se  hai. 

4.  Wuh    mere    liye    bare 

aram  ka  hai. 

5.  Wuh  sara  kam  karta  hai 

aur  kabhi  shikayat  na- 
hin  karta. 

6.  Jab  wuh  burha  ho  jaegu 

tab  main  usju  parwa- 
rish  karufiga. 

7.  Hindustan  men  log:  apne 

naukron   se    achchha 
bartava  karte  hain. 

8.  Ve_unse  kafi  se  ziyada 

kam  nahm  lete. 

9.  Ve  Angrezi  zuban  asani 

se  sikh  lete  hain. 

10.  Kya  tumhara  bhi  yahi 

tajurba  hai  ? 

11.  Abhi  mujhe  yahan  kafi 

vakt  nahin  hua. 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  Phrases. 

1  lit.,  with  you  (in  your  possession)  faithful  servant  is  :  5  lit.,  he  all 
work  does,  and  never  complaint  does  ;  shikayat  (she-kah-yat)  com  plaint ; 
6  lit.,  when  he  old  gone  is  then  I  him  support  shall  do  ;  7  bartava,  treat- 
ment ;  8  lit.,  they  them  enough  than  more  work  not  take. 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 


Ill 


I  believe  that  you  are 

right. 
Be  pleased  to  come  this 

way. 

Kindly  read  this  letter. 
Please    give    me    your 

address. 

Do  not  go  yet. 
Is  there  much  game  in 

this  neighbourhood  ? 
There    is    much  small 

game  and    there  are 

some  tigers. 
Partridges    and   water- 
fowl   are    abundant 

here. 
Bring  the  guns  and  a 

few  bullets. 
Take  aim  carefully. 

You   have    missed   the 

aim  (  =  mark). 
When  it  is  cool  we  will 

go  into  the  wood. 
Do     you    think     there 

is  any  game  there  ? 

Can  you  swim  ? 


1.  Mujhe  yakin  hai  ki  turn 

thlk  ho. 

2.  Is  raste  se  aiye. 

3.  Is  khat  ko  parhiye. 

4.  Mujlie    apna    pata   di- 


5.  Abhi  na  jaiye. 

6.  Kya  paros    men  bahut 

shikar  hai  ? 

7.  Vahan_  bahut  sa  chhota 

shikar  hai  aur  kuchh 
sher  hain. 

8.  Titar  aur  batakh  yahan 

bakasrat  hain. 

9.  Banduk^  aur  kuchh  go- 

lian  lao. 
10.  Hoshiyari    se    nishana 

lag-ao. 
11    Turn  nishana  chuk  gaye. 

12.  Jab  thanda  ho  jaega  tab 

ham  jangal  men  jaenge. 

13.  Kya  tumhara  khyal  hai 

ki  vahan  ko'i   shikar 
hai? 

14.  Kya  turn  tair  sakte  ho  ? 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  Phrases. 

1  literally,  my  belief  is  that  you  right  are  ;  10  hoshiyari  (boh- 
she-yah-ree),  carefully  ;  hoshiyar  also  means :  clever  ami  skilful  ; 
13  literally,  what,  your  thought  is  that  there  any  game  is  / 


112  HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 

PROGRESSIVE    READING, 
with  Literal  Translation  and  correct  English  Rendering. 


Ek    rivaj    Hindustan    men    kadlm    zamane    se 
One    custom         India  in        ancient        times     from 

jari    hai.      Larki    ki    shad!    karna     bap      ha- 

current  is.  A  girl      of     marriage    to  do    the  father      al- 

mesha    apna    awwal    farz    samajhta    hai.      Ek 
ways        his  (own)    first          duty  considers.  A 

vazir  ne    apni    jawan    beti    ke    liye,   jo 

minister  (of  state)     his  (own)  young    daughter  for,     who 

bahut    bad-surat    thi    ek    achchhe    talim-yafta 

very  ugly          was      a  well  educated 

naujawan     ki    bahut     talash     ki     lekin    bila 

youth  of        much  searched  but    without 

kisi    natije    ke.       Akhirkar     usne     apni     beti 

any        result       of.  At  last  he  his  daughter 

ki     shadi     ek     andhe     admi    se    kar    di,    aur 

of       marriage    a          blind        man       with  performed,      and 

uski    parvarish    ke     liye     use     bahut     daulat 
his          maintenance  for        him        much          wealth 

di.       Thore    dinon    ke    bad    ek    mashhur   aur 
gave.         A  few        days  after      a          famous        and 

kabil     hakim,    jo       andhon       ka     ilaj     karta 

able        physician,     who    blind  people        of  treatment    doing 

tha,    vazir    ke    shaihar    men    ay  a.     Vazir    ke 

was,  the  minister's        town  in      came.     The  minister's 

doston    ne    us    se    kaha    ki  :    Tumhare  damad 
friends  hkfl    to      said  (that) :         Your      son-in-law 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 


113 


ka    ilaj    karane    ka 
treatment      do          of 

ne   jawab    diya    ki : 

reply      gave  (that) : 


achchha    mauka  hai.    Us 

good      opportunity     is.        He 

Main    apne    damad     ka 

I      my  (own)    son-in-law     of 


ilaj      hargiz     naiim 
cure         ever              not 

darta       nun       ki 
afraid            am        that 

hasil      karne       par 
obtained     having          on 

napasand       karne 
dislike            to  do 

bhala'I      isi      men 

welfare         this        in 

chahta, 

wish, 

ankhon 

eyes 

wuh 

he 

lagegra. 

will  begin. 

Hai      ki 

is        that 

kyiinki     main 
because            I 

ki        raushni 

of                light 

meri      beti      ko 

my       daughter 

Meri     beti     ki 
My    daughter     of 

uska     khavind 
her            husband 

zindgi       bhar       andha       rahe. 
life  throughout      blind  remain. 


Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 

From  ancient  days,  it  has  been  a  custom  in  India  for  a  father 
to  make  it  his  first  duty  to  give  his  daughter  in  marriage.  v 

There  was  a  minister  of  state  who  had  a  very  plain  daughter. 
He  made  great  search  for  a  well  educated  youth  who  would 
marry  her,  but  without  success.  At  last  he  married  her  to  a 
blind  man,  to  whom  he  also  gave  great  wealth  for  his  maintenance. 

A  short  time  after,  a  famous  physician,  who  had  treated  many 
blind  people,  came  to  the  city  where  the  minister  dwelt,  and  his 
friends  said  :  This  is  a  good  opportunity  for  your  son-in-law  to 
be  cured.  But  the  minister  replied  :  I  do  not  wish  my  son-in- 
law  to  be  cured,  because  I  fear,  if  his  sight  were  restored,  he 
might  begin  to  dislike  my  daughter.  Her  welfare  depends  upon 
her  husband  remaining  blind  all  his  life. 


114  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE    EAST. 

Meh    ki    amad    Hindustan    men    bara    vakiya 

Rain      of      advent          India  in        great        event 

hai,    kyunki    Hindustan     zirayati     mulk     hai 
is,         because  India  agricultural    country        is 

aur    achchhi     fasl     ke     liye     thik    vakt    par 

and          good          crops  for        proper    time          at 

men    ka    kafi     mikdar     men    parna     nihayat 

rain        of    enough    quantity          in          falling       extremely 

zaruri     hai.       Iske     alava     barish     se     hava 

important    is.  This       besides        rainfall      by,        air 

men    tari    aur  thandak    ati    hai,   jis    se    gar- 

in      moisture  and      coolness    coming    is,    which  for      heat 

mi    se    tang    ae    hue    logon    ko    aram    milta 
with  troubled          people  comfort    received 

hai.         Kheton     aur     maidanofi      men     ghas 

is.  Fields          and        open  spaces          in  grass 

bahutayat  se  ugati  hai  aur  barsat  men  maveshi 

abundance    with  grown    is      and  rainy  season  in        cattle 

ziyada-tar    hari    ghas    par     hi     raihte     hain. 
mostly  green    grass       on  living        are. 

Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 
The  advent  of  rain  is  a  great  event  in  India,  because  India 
is  an  agricultural  country  and  in  order  to  get  good  crops,  it  is 
extremely  important  that  a  sufficient  quantity  of  rain  should  fall 
at  the  right  time.  Moreover,  rain  brings  moisture  and  coolness 
in  the  air,  which  is  a  great  comfort  to  the  people  who  are  troubled 
by  the  heat.  In  fields  and  open  spaces,  there  is  abundance  of 
grass,  and  in  the  rainy  season  the  cattle  live  almost  entirely  on 
green  grass. 


HI  GO  8  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY.  115 


FIFTEENTH    LESSON. 


37.— 1.  There  is  only  one  RELATIVE  PRONOUN  in  Hin- 
dustani, namely  JO  Gob)  WHO,  WHICH  ;  as  in  : 

the  boy  who  was  here  larka  jo  yahan  tha 

the  horse  which  is  in  the         ghora  jo  us  khet  men  hal 
field 

2.  JO  followed  by  ne  becomes  jis  (jiss)  in  the  Singular 
and  jinhofi  (jin-hon-,)  in  the  Plural,  as  in  : 

the  dog  which  killed  »>«  cat       kutta  jis  ne  billl  ko  mar  dala 
the  goats  which  ate  np  the       bakarian  jinhon  ne  ghas  kha 
gras-s  dall 

3.  JO  (WHOM,  WHICH)  followed  by  ko,  or  some  other 
Preposition,  also  becomes  jis  in  the  Singular,  but  Jin  in 
the  Plural,  as  in  : 

the  man  whom  I  called  adml  jis  ko  main  ne  bulaya 

the  boy  to  wl-im  I  showed  larka  jis  par  main  ne  raham 

kindness  kiya 

the  horses  which  he  bought  ghore  jin  ko  us  ne  kh.arlda 

the  sheep  which  the  butcher  bher  jin    ko     kasa'f    ne    kat 

cat  up  dala 

4.  When  ko  is  omitted,  JO  remains  unchanged,  as  in  : 
the  field  which  he  reaped  khet  jo  us  ne  kate 

the  water  which  1   drew        pan!  jo  main  ne  ku'e1  se  ni- 
f  rom  the  well  kala* 


38. — WHOSE  (or  OP  WHOM,  OP  WHICH)  is  also  rendered 
by  jis  in  the  Singular  and  by  jin  in  the  Plural,  as  in: 

the  boy  whose  book  is  here         larka  jiski  kitab  yahan  hai 
houses  of  which  the  doors        makan   jinke    darvaze  tute1 

are  broken  hain 

this  country  the  rivers  of        yeh  mulk  jiski  nadian4  &m*\- 
which  are  like  those  of  ca  ki  tarah  hain 

America 

1.  ku'a  (koo-ah),  well. 

2.  nikalna  (ni-kahl-nah),  to  draw  (aa  water}. 

3.  tutna  (toot-nah),  to  be  broken. 

4.  nadl  rirer  ;    nadian,  rirers. 


116 


HUGOS   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


SUE 


suraj,  m. 


soo-radj 

inoon  chand,  m. 


star 
sky 

shade 


chahn#d 
tah-rah 
ahs-mahr, 


,  m. 
,  m. 


(saya,  m. 
1  ?hhaya,  f  . 

say-ya>  cb'hah-yah 
sunshine  <UXUp,  t. 


to  shine 

cha-mak-nm. 

shining  ehamkdar 

or  bright         chamk-dahr 

clear  saf 

sahf 

air,  wind  hava,  f. 

ha-vah 

bot  winds  lU,  f. 

loo 

storm  tufa~n,  m. 

too-fahn 

wind,  sandstorm  andhl,  f. 
ahn^d-hee 

sand  ret,  m. 

rayt 

sandy  retila 

ray-  tee-lab 


earth  khak,  f. 

(ashes)  h'cbahk 

desert          reg-istan,  m. 

ray-gis-talm 

rain  meh,  m. 

may'h 

to  rain  barasna 

bar-as-nah 

cloud  badal.  m. 

bah-dal 

thunder  garaj,  f. 

ga-radj 

lightning          bijll,  f. 
bid  j -lee 

flash  chaniak,  f. 

oha-mat 

damage  nuksan,  harjana 

nuk-sahn,  har-jah-nah 

danger  khatra,  m. 

h'chat-rah 

dangerous        khatarnak 

h'chat-ar-nahk 

snow,  ice          baraf,  £. 
ba-raf 

hail  Ola,  m. 

oh-lah 

useful  nmfid 

muf-eed 

usually  amuman 

a- moo- man 


49. 

1.  Raste  ke  darakhton  ka  saya  garm  dhup 
men  bahut  mufld  hai.  2.  Jab  meh  barasta  hai, 
tab  badal  ki  garaj  aur  bijli  ki  chamak  aksar 
sath  hot!  hai.  3.  Hindustan  men  asman  aniu- 
man  saf  raihta  hai.  4.  Chand  aur  tare  khub 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE  EAST.  117 

chamakte  hue  nazar1  ate  hain.  5.  Rajputana 
Hindustan  men  retila  hissa  hai.  6.  Vahan  an- 
dhi  aksar  at!  hain.  7.  Dhake  men  tufan  baz- 
vakt*  bahut  nuksan  karta  hai.  8.  Ma'i  aur  Jun 
ki  lu  bar!  khatarnak  hot!  hain. 

1  nazar,  sight,  view  ;  nazar  ana,  to  be  seen. 
2  bazvakt,  sometimes. 

49a. 

1.  The  shade  of  the  trees  on  the  path  is  very  useful  in 
the  hot  sunshine.  2.  When  rain  falls  (=it  fains)  the  thun- 
der of  the  clouds  and  the  Hash  of  lightning  ^ften  occur  with 
it.  3.  The  sky  is  usually  clear  in  India.  4.  The  moon  and 
the  stars  are  seen  shining  brightly.  5.  Rajputana  is  a  sandy 
part  of  (in)  India.  6.  Sandstorms  often  come  there.  7.  In 
Dacca  a  storm  sometimes  does  much  fiamage.  8.  The  hot 
winds  of  May  and  June  are  very  dangerous. 


50. 

1.  Jab  asman  men  badal  a  jate  hain,  tab  suraj 
ki  g-arnii  kam  ho  jati  hai.  2.  Himalaya  pahar 
ki  chotion1  par  hamesha  baraf  raihti  hai.  3.  Re- 
g-istan  men  unt2  par  sawar  ho  kar  jate  hain.  4.  Sir 
par  ola  parne  men  khatra  hai.  5.  Tumhen  dukan- 
dar3  ko  harjana  dena  hogra.  6.  Ek  din  khak 
men  mil  jana  hai. 

1  chotl  (choh-tee),   peak  ;    2  uat  (oonjt),   camel ;    3  dukandar 
(duk-ahn-dahr),  shopkeeper. 

50a. 

1.  When  clouds  appear  in  the  sky,  the  heat  of  the  sun 
diminishes  (less  becomes).  2.  There  is  always  snow  on  the 
peaks  of  the  Himalayas.  3.  They  go  into  the  deserts  riding 
on  camels.  4.  There  is  danger  in  hail  falling  on  the  head. 
5.  You  will  have  to  pay  damages  to  the  shopkeeper.  6.  One 
day  we  have  to  mingle  with  the  earth=die  (Indian  proverb). 


118  HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST. 


39. — The  FAMILIAR  FORM  of  the  SECOND  PERSON. 
THOU  tu  THEE  tujhe  or  tujhko 

too  tudj-hay         tudj'h-koh 

THY,  THINE  tera,  tere,  teri 

tay-rah,  tay-ray,  tay-ree 

EXAMPLES. 

If  It  was  not  thou,  it  must  have  Agar  frfi  na  tha,  to  tera  bap 

been  thy  father.  raha  hoga. 

1  thought  he  would  have  told  Mera  khyal  tha  ki  usne  tujh 

thee.  se  kaih  diya  hoga. 

Foreigners  should  avoid  the  use  of  this  pronoun. 


40. — The  verb  lagna,  which  really  means  '  to  stick,'  is 
used  in  various  ways.     It  often  means  '  to  begin,'  ag  in  ; 
he  began  to  eat  wuh  khane  laga 

we  shall  begin  to  read  ham  parhne  lagenge 

NOTE. — Before  lagna  the  a  cf  the  Infinitive  changes  into  e,  as 
illustrated  above. 


Further  usages  of  lagna. 

I  feel  hot  mujhe  g-armi  lagti  hai 

I  feel  pain  or  pity  mujhe  dard  lagta  hai 

this  picture  is  stuck  on  yeh  tasvir  dival   mefl 

the  wall  lagl  hai 

the  physician  applies  the  hakim  dava  lagata  hai 

medicine  [hai 

I  enjoy  it  mujhe   achchha   lagta 

you  do  whatever    you  turn    jo    chahe_  karo, 

like,  what  does  it  mat-  mera  kya  lagta  hai  ? 

ter  to  me  ? 

how  many  rupees  did  is  mez   men  kitne  ru- 

this  table  cost  ?  paye  lage  ? 

the  argument  does  not  yeh  dalil  nahlfi  lagtl 
apply 


HUGO  8   HINDUSTANI   MADE    EAST. 


119 


CONVERSATIONAL    PHRASES. 


Which  is  the  best  news- 
paper ? 

Can  you  tell  me  of  a 
good  newspaper  ? 

Are  the  newspapers 
written  in  Hindi  cha- 
racters ? 

It  is  very  difficult  to 
read  the  Hindi  let- 
ters. 

When  I  have  been  a 
little  longer  in  In- 
dia I  hope  to  read 
them  easily. 


One  gets  confused  with 
the  different  dialects. 

You  tell  me  that  the 
Hindi  language  as 
given  in  this  book, 
is  understood  all  over 
India  ? 

If  you  do  not  go  now 
yon  will  be  too  late 
(=much  lateness). 


1. 


Sab  se  achchha  akhbar 
kaun  hai  ? 

Kya  turn  mujhe  ek  ach- 
chha akhbar  bata  sak- 
teho? 

Kya  akhbar  Hindi  ha- 
rafon  mefi  likhe  jate 
hain? 

4.  Hindi  haruf  parhna  ba- 
hut  mushkil  hota  hai. 


2. 


3. 


5. 


6. 


7. 


Jab  mujhe  Hindustan 
mofl  kuchh  aur  din  ho 
jaenge  tab  maifi  um- 
mid  karta  hun  ki 
unhefi  asani  se  parh 


Mukhtalif  bolion  se  ad- 
mi  g-habra  jata  hai. 

Turn  mujh  se  kaihte  ho 
ki  Hindi  zuban  jaisi  is 
kitab  men  di  hui  hai, 
sare  Hindustan  men 
«»amjhi  jati  hai  ? 

Ag"ar_ap  abhi  nahin  jate 
to  apko  bahut  der  ho 
jaegi. 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  Phrases. 
1  lit.,  all  than  good  newspaper,  which  is  ?     2  bata,  from  batana,  to 
tell,  to  acquaint ;  5  kuchh  aur  din,  lit.,  some  more  days  (idiomatic  for  : 
a  little  longer)  ;  nmmid,  hope  (noun),  ummid  karna,  to  hope  (lit.,  hope 
do)  ;     6  lit.,  differ  Mit  upeeches  with,  one  confused  going  is. 


120 


HUGOS   HINDUSTANI   MADE    KAST. 


In  India  two  kinds  of 
carriages  are  used. 

They  are  called  bullock- 
carts  and  horse-car- 
riages. 

Bullock-carts  are  used 
in  the  villages. 

Horse-carriages  are  used 
in  the  towns. 

We  will  go  out  for  a 

drive. 
Our  friends  will  go  on 

horseback. 
We  shall  be  back  (re- 

turn)  at  nine  o'clock. 
I    cannot    go    out,  be- 

cause  it  is  too   hot. 

He  is  ill,  therefore  he 

cannot  come. 
My  sister  is   preparing 

the  tea. 
Put  plenty  of  sugar  in 

the  tea. 
The      children       want 

(need)  some  milk. 
There   is   no    milk    in 

the  house. 


1.  Hindustan  men  do  kism 

ki  garian  istemal   ki 
jati  hain. 

2.  Unko  bailgari  aur  gho- 

ragari  kaihte  hain. 

3.  Bailgarian    gaon    men 

istemal  ki  jati  hain. 

4.  Ghoragarian  _shaiharon 

men    istemal    ki  jati 
hain. 

5.  Ham    gari   men    bahar 

jaenge. 

6.  Hamare  dost  ghoron  par 

jaenge. 

7.  Ham     nau     baje     laut 

a'enge. 

8.  Main    bahajr   nahin    ja 

sakta    chunki    garmi 
bahut  hai. 

9.  Wuh   bimar  hai,  isliye 

wuh  a  nahin  sakta. 

10.  Meri  baihin  cha  taiyar 

kar  rahi  hai. 

11.  Cha^  men    chmi    khub 

dalo. 

12.  Bachchon     ko      kuchh 

dudh  ki  zarurat  hai. 

13.  Ghar  men  dudh  bilkul 

nahin  hai. 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  Phrases. 

1,  3  &  4  istemal  ki  jati  hain,  lit.,  use  of  going  are  ;  7  laut,  from 
lautna  (lawt-nah),  to  return  ;  12  lit.,  to  the  children  some  milk  neces- 
sary is  ;  13  lit.,  in  the  house  milk  at  all  not  is. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  HADE   EASY.  121 

PROGRESSIVE    READING, 

with  Literal  Translation  and  correct  English  Rendering. 


Mandi  men. — Rahim,  dekho !  turn  apna  su- 
Market  in.  —  Rahim,  look  here  I  your  own  morn- 
ball  ka  kam  khatm  kar  ke,  sabzi  mandi 

ing's  work     finished        done,  fruit  and  vegetable  market 

men  jao.  Phal  Abdulla  mevafarosh  se  aur 
in  go.  Fruic  Abdulla  fruit-seller  from  and 

tarkari  Ilahi  Beg  kunjre  se  lana.  Anar, 
vegetables  Ilahi  Beg  greengrocer  from  bring.  Pomegranates, 

am       aur    kela    ek  ek  darjan  lana.       Angur, 

mangoes  and  plantains    each        dozen      bring.  Grapes, 

khajur    aur    pista    ek    ek       ser       lana.      Ab- 

dates  and       nuts        each       two  pounds    bring.        Ab- 

dulla    se    puchhna  ki :    hamko    Kullu  ki    seb, 

dulla    from      inquire      that :        us  Kullu      of  apples, 

Kashmir    ki    nashpati,    Kuete    ke     aru       aur 

Cashmere        of        pears,  Quetta      of      peaches       and 

kharbuze  kab  milenge  ?    Ilahi  Beg  se     kaihna 

melons  when    shall  get  ?         Ilahi     Beg    to     might  say 

ki    hamko     us     ne     abhi     phulgobhi,     matar, 

that    us  to        him      by       as  yet      cauliflowers,         peas, 

patgobhi  aur  tamatar  nahm  diye  hain, 
cabbages  and  tomatoes  not  given  are, 

agarche  unka  mausim  a-gaya  hai.  Ham 
although  their  season  arrived  is.  We 


122  HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 

alu,     muli,     shalgham,  gajar  aur  piyaz  khate- 

potatoes,  radishes,        turnips,      carrots    and    onions        eat- 

khate     thak     g*aye     haifL       Hamare     parausi 

ing  tired  are.  Our  neighbour 

sahib     ke     pas,     unke     kunjre     ne     baingan, 

gentleman       by  his       greengrocer 

bhiiidi         aur        kaddu       pahunchaye      hain. 

supplied  are. 

Turn    apne     kunjre     ko    khabardar 
You          our      greengrocer    to  warning 

agrar    wuh    aur    achchhe     kunjron    ki     tarah 
if  he        other        good  greengrocers          like 

hamko    tarkari  nahm  muhayya  karegu,  to  ham 
to  us      vegetables      not         supply  will  do,  then     we 

us    se    kharidna    chhor  dengre.    In   sab  chizon 
him  from        to  buy  cease  shall.       These    all        things 

ko     mazdur     ke     sar     par    liva    lana. 
porter          of        head        on      bring  (fetch). 


Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 

At  the  market. — Rahim,  look  here  !  when  your  morning's 
work  is  finished,  go  to  the  fruit  and  vegetable  market,  and  bring 
fruit  from  the  fruiterer  Abdulla,  and  vegetables  from  the 
greengrocer  Ilahi  Beg. 

Bring  pomegranates,  mangoes  and  bananas  (plantains)  one 
dozen  of  each.  Also  grapes,  dates  and  pistachio  nuts  two  pounds 
of  each.  Inquire  of  Abdulla  when  we  shall  get  the  apples  of  Kullu, 
the  pears  of  Cashmere  and  the  peaches  and  melons  of  Quetta. 

Tell  Ilahi  Beg  that  we  have  not  yet  been  supplied  with 
cauliflowers,  ceas  and  tomatoes,  although  their  season  has  come. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY.  123 

We  are  tired  of  eating  potatoes,  radishes,  turnips,  carrots  and 
onions.  Our  neighbour  obtained  from  his  greengrocer  (the  three 
vegetables  mentioned  in  the  text).  You  must  warn  our  green- 
grocer that  if  he  does  not  supply  us  with  vegetables  like  other 
good  greengrocers,  we  shall  cease  to  buy  from  him.  Bring  all 
the  goods  on  the  head  of  a  porter. 

Ek  amir  admi  ek  fakir  ko  apne  jawa- 
A  rich  man  an  ascetic  to  his  jewels 

hirat      dikha     raha     tha.       Fakir    ne     kaha 

showing  was.        The  fakir  said 

ki :  In  jawahirat  men  hissa  batane  ke 
(that) :  These  jewels  in  share  distributing 

liye  tumhara  mashkur  him.  —  Kya  !  mere 
for  to  you  grateful  am.  What  I  my 

jawahirat     men    hissa !       Apka    matlab    kya 

jewels  in        share  !  Your        meaning     what 

hai  ?  —  Turn  mujhe  inko  dekhane  ki  ija- 
is  ?  You  me  these  seeing  of  per- 

zat  dete  ho.  Iske  alawa,  turn  hi  in 
mission  gave.  This  besides,  you  them 

se       kya     kar   sakte    ho  ? 
with      what        doing  can        be  ? 


Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 

A  rich  man  was  showing  his  jewels  to  an  ascetic.  I  am 
grateful  to  you,  said  the  latter,  for  sharing  your  jewels  with  me. 

What !  sharing  my  jewels  1    What  do  you  mean  ? 

You  allowed  me  to  look  at  them ;  besides  this,  what  more 
can  you  do  with  them? 


124  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 


SIXTEENTH    LESSON. 


41.— CAUSAL  VERBS. 

This  term  implies  that  something  is  caused  to  be  done, 
to  take  place,  or  to  be  brought  about. 

A  simp_le  verb  can  be  made  causal  and  doubly  causal  by 
inserting  a  and  WE,  respectively,  between  the  stem  of  the 
verb  and  the  termination.  Many  Causals  are  better  translated 
by  different  words.  Examples  : 

sunna    TO  HEAR 

sunana,  to  tell  (=to  cause  to  hear) 
sunwana,  to  cause  to  be  told 

parhna    TO  READ 

parhana,  to  teach,  instruct  (=to  cause  or  make  to  read) 
parhwana,  to  cause  to  be  taught  or  instructed 


In  many  cases  the  Causal  and  the  doubly  Causal  verb 
have  the  same  meaning,  as  : 

milna    TO  MEET 

milana  or  milwana,  to  cause  or  arrange  to  meet 

karna    TO  DO 

karana  or  karwana,  to  cause  to  be  done,  to  bring  about 


Some  Causal  verbs  are  formed  irregularly,  as  : 
sona    TO  SLEEP 

sulana,  to  make  one  go  to  sleep 

sulwana,  to  cause  (some  one)  to  make  (another)  go  to  sleep 

letna    TO  LIE  DOWN 

litana,  to  make  (some  one)  lie  down 

litwana,  to  cause  (some  one)  to  make  (another)  lie  down 

sma    TO  SEW,  STITCH 

Silana  or  silwana,  to  cause  to  be  sewn  or  stitched 

dh.ona    TO  WASH 

dhulana  or  dhulwana,  to  cause  to  be  washed 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EAST.  125 

4  2  .—INTERJECTIONS. 
Some  of  the  most  commonly  used  INTERJECTIONS,  are  : 


ai  !     oh  !     hallo  ! 

hai  hai  !     what  a  pity  I 

hay  hay !    alas ! 


K -    .  ^-    .   ,    ,  hoshiyar !    be  careful  I 

bap  !  Dap  !   help  !  rnercy  ! 


literally  :  father  !  father  1 


wah  jviih  !\  bravo  !  or 
Shabash  !  I     well  done  1 


bahut  achchha !  all  right ' 
Chup  !    hush  ! 
dur  !    begone  ! 


ya  Khuda  !    0,  God  i 

afSOS  !     sorry  !    (lit.  sorrow  !) 
ch  h  l  chill !     shame  I 


to  play  khelna,  causal :  khilana  |    to  bite  katna,  causal :  katana 
to  rob  lutna,  causal  :  lutwana 


snake  sanp 


nurse  da'l 

dah-ee 


scoundrel        badmash 

bad-mahsh 

game,  play        khel 
k'hayl 


51. 

1.  Hay  hay !  is  gharib  ko  badmash  ne  luta- 
wa  diya.  2.  Shabash!  turn  ne  khub  khel  khi- 
laya.  3.  Han,  man  ne  da'i  se  bachche  ko  su- 
lane  ke  liye  kaha  tha.  4.  Ya  Khuda  !  is  larke 
ko  chahe  jitna  parhaen  kuchh  asar  nahm  hota 
5.  Bap !  bap !  yeh  mujhe  sanp  se  katata  hai.  6 
Bahut  achchha !  main  us  admi  se  wahi  ka- 
raunga  jo  ap  chahte  hain. 

'  51a. 

1.  Alas  !  the  scoundrel  caused  this  poor  man  to  be 
robbed.     2.  Bravo  !  you  caused  a  nice  game  to  be  played. 

3.  Yes,  the  mother  told  the  nurse  to  put  the  child  to  sleep. 

4.  Oh  God  !  whatever  one  may  teach  this  boy,  it  has  no 
effect.     5.  Help!  mercy!  this  man  causes  the  snake  to  bite 
me.     6.  All  right !  (or  very  well !)  I  shall  make  this  man 
do  what  yon  want. 


J.26  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE  EAST. 

43. — When  addressing  an  officer  of  high  rank,  the 
word  Huzur  (your  honour)  may  be  used.  In  connection 
with  this,  note  the  following  : 

TO  ARRIVE  is  tashrlf  lana 

TO  DEPART  is  tashrif  le  jana 

used  in  such  expressions  as  : 

When  did  your  honour  arrive  ?        Huzur  kab  tashrif  la'e  haifi  t 
When  will  your  honour  leave  or  depart  ? 

Huziir  kab  tashrif  le  jaenge  ? 

tashrif  implies  :  the  honour  of  your  presence  ;  tash.- 
rif  lana  therefore  means  :  _to  _bring  the  honour  of  your 
presence,  and  tashrif  le  jana  means  :  to  take  away  the 
honour  of  your  presence.  The  verb,  of  course,  must  be  in 
the  Third  Person  Plural  (polite  form). 

These  expressions  are  also  used  in  ordinary  conversation. 


44. — The  following  hints  with  regard  to  SALUTATION 
and  THANKS,  may  be  of  service. 

The  ordinary  salutation  is  salam,  PEACE.  The  fol- 
lowing expressions  are  in  common  use  : 

salam  karna  to  greet  or  salute 

salam  bolna  or  |         to  give  or  send  greetings  or  saln- 
salam  dena        J  tations 

which  is  a  polite  way  of  sending  for  anyone  you  wish 
to  speak  to. 

For  instance,  patwari  ko  salam  do  (or  salam  bolo) 

means  :  give  my  salam  to  the  patwari  (village  accountant), 
by  which  message  the  accountant  will  understand  that  you 
want  to  speak  to  him. 

Again,  when  someone  calls  to  see  you,  and  sends  in  his 
card,  you  say  to_your  servant  who  brings  you  the  card, 
salam  do  or  salam  bolo.  The  servant  gives  your  salam 
to  the  caller,  who  then  comes  in  to  pay  his  visit. 

_Hindus  often  greet  one  another  with  the  cry  Ham  ! 
Ram  !  (the  name  of  a  deity). 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST.  127 

45. — THANK  YOU,  to  servants  and  inferiors  Js  ex- 
pressed by  bahut  achchha,  or  merely_  achchha,  *  all 
right,'  'that  will  do.'  Bahut  achchha  is  also  used  in 
the  literal  sense  of  'very  well.' 

THANK  YOU,  to  equals  and  superiors  is  _expressed  by 
shukr,  shukr  hai  or  shukr  guzar  hona,  thus : 

thanks  shukr  or  shukr  hai 

I  thank  you         main  ap  ka  shukr  guzar  hun 


46. — aur  (AND)  is  often  omitted  between  two  Nouns, 
AS  in  : 

boys  and  girls  larke  larkiyan 

milk  and  sugar  dudh  shakar 

up  and  down  unch  nlch 

big  and  little  chote  bare 

AND  in  certain  cases  is  expressed  by  O,  as  in  : 

ab  o  hava  water  and  air  (that  is,  climate) 

sard  o  garm  cold  and  hot 


47. — The   word  hi  conveys  emphasis,  and  can    be 

added  to  almost  any  word,  as  in  : 
only  one  ek  hi 

just  before  paihle  hi  se 

it  happened  just  here  yahan  hi  hua  tha 

I  have  called  YOU  main  ne  turn  hi  ko  bulaya 
(not  another)  hai 

hi  is  often  placed  between  two  words  for  additional 
emphasis,  thus  : 

wuh  dekhte  hi  dekhte  gfcayab  ho  gaya 

he  disappeared  while  we  were  just  looking  (=in  a  moment) 


48. — The  verb  chahna  (to  wish  or  want  to),  is  used 
idiomatically  to  express  that  something  is  about  to  take 
place,  as  in  : 

he  is  about  to  come  here  wuh  yahan  aya  ehahta  hai 

(=he  is  due) 
the  clock  is  about  to  strike  |      gharl  baja  chahtl  hai 


128  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 

49. — The  addition  of  the  word  wala  can  make_almost 
any  verb  into  a  noun,  expressing  agency.  Wala  takes 
gender  and  number,  wala,  wale,  wall. 

The  final  a  of  the  verb  changes  into  6  before  wala. 

EXAMPLES. 

from  bechna,  to  sell  comes  bechnewala,  a  seller 

„    kharidna,  to  buy  „  kharldnewala,  a  buyer 

„    dena,  to  give  „  denewala,  a  giver 

„    likhna,  to  write  „  likhnewala,  a  writer 


50. — wala  can  also  be  added  to  a  noun,  and  indicates 
the  PERSON  connected  with  the  thing  expressed  by  the  noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

from  shaihar,  a  town  comes    shaiharwala,  a  townsman 

„     gaon,  a  village  „        gaonwala,  a  villager 

„    phal,  a  fruit  „        phalwala,  a  fruiterer 

,,    phul,  a  flower  „        phulwala,  a  flower-seller 

52. 

1.  main  ap  ko  likli  hi  raha  tha ;  2.  wuh  yeh 
karna  hi  chahta  tha ;  3.  grhar  pas  hi  hai ;  4. 
wuh  ja  hi  rahi  thi  ki  wuh  agaye ;  5.  main  is 
jagah  ka  raihnewala  nahm  him ;  6.  graonwalon 
ke  banisbat  shaiharwale  amuman  zyada  parhe 
likhe  hote  ham;  7.  is  ghore  ka  kharldnewala 
kaun  hai  ?  8.  Chinwale  bare  achchhe  karigrar 
hote  hain ;  9.  marnewale  se  bachanewala  bara 

hai. 

52a. 

1.  1  was  just  writing  to  you  ;  2.  he  was  going  (=just 
about)  to  do  it ;  3.  the  house  is  quite  close  by  ;  4.  she 
was  just  (on  the  point  of)  going,  when  they  arrived  ;  5.  I 
am  not  a  resident  of  this  place  ;  6.  townsmen  are  gener- 
ally better  educated  than  villagers  ;  7.  who  is  the  buyer  of 
this  horse  ?  8.  the  Chinese  are  excellent  craftsmen  ;  9.  the 
saviour  is  greater  than  the  slayer. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE    EASY. 


129 


CONVERSATIONAL     PHRASES. 


There  are  four  paihars 

(= watches)  in  the  day. 

There     are     also     four 

watches  in  the  night. 
A    summer's    day    has 

five  watches. 
One    hour    is    a    very 

short  time. 
The  sun  shone  all  the 

afternoon . 
It  is  very  bad  to  sleep 

till  eight  o'clock. 
You  should  always  get 

up  at  five  o'clock  in 

the  morning. 
Last  night  I  was  awake 

all  night. 
It  is   difficult  to  sleep 

when  it  is  very  hot. 


1. 


2. 


3. 


The  mosquitoes  are  very 

troublesome. 
A     mosquito-net    is    a     11. 

necessity. 
Go  and  buy  one  at  the     12. 

bazaar. 


Din  men  char  paihar 
hote  hain. 

Rat  men  bhi  char  pai- 
har hote  hain. 

Garini  ke  din  men  panch 
paihar  hote  hain. 

4.  Ek  ghanta  bahut  thora 

vakt  hai. 

5.  Suraj      sare      sepaihar 
_  chamakta  raha. 

Ath  baje  tak  sona  bahut 

kharab  hai. 
Turn  ko  subah  hamesha 

panch  baje  uthna  cha- 

hiye. 
Kal  main  sari  rat  jagta 

raha. 
Jab  bahut   g-armi    hot! 

hai,  tab  sona  mushkil 

hota  hai. 
Machchhar  bahut  taklif 

dete  hain. 
Masahri  zaruri  hai. 


6. 


7. 


8. 


9. 


10. 


J'a'o   bazar 
le  a'o. 


se  ek   mol 


Explanatory  Notes  to  the  above  Phrases. 

6  literally,  the  sun  whole  afternoon  shining  remained  ;  ohamakna,  to 
shine  ;  8  lit.,  yesterday  I  whole  night  awake  remained  ;  jagna,,  to 
awake  ;  12  mol  lena,  to  purchase  ;  mol  le  a'o,  idiomatic  for  :  go  and 
buy  (lit.,  purchase  taking  come). 

B.8. — 5 


130 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EAST. 


No  one  knew  where  he 

had  gone. 
Some  were  saying  one 

thing,  some  another 
The  town  is  not  very 

far  from  here. 
There  is  a  village  close 

by. 
After  a  time  we  shall 

get  used  to  it. 
That  is  his  own  story. 
The  dog  went    of  his 

own  accord. 
If  you  do  that  you  will 
get  yourself  into  trouble. 
It  is  your  own  fault. 

He  deceived  himself 
and  his  friends. 

I  forgot  myself. 

Nobody  goes  near  him. 

I  was  nearly  dead  with 
fright. 

He  may  have  told  me. 

He  must  have  done  it. 

When  he  comes  you 
must  say  to  him  (that) 
I  have  done  it. 

Do  as  I  tell  you. 

Do  not  be  so  slow. 


1.  Kisi  ko  na  jnalum  tha 

ki  wuh  kalian  guya  hai. 

2.  Ko'i  yeh  kali  raha  tha, 

aur  ko'i  wuh. 

3.  Shaihar   yahan  se  dur 

nahm  hai. 

4.  Ek  g-aon  nazdlk  hai. 

5.  Kuchh_din  ke  bad  ham 

iske  adi  ho  jaenge. 

6.  Yeh  usi  ka  kissa  hai. 

7.  Kutta  ap  hi  chala  graya. 

8.  Agrar  turn  yeh  karog*e  to 

afat  mefl  phans  jaoge. 

9.  Yeh  tumhara  hi  kasur 

hai. 

10.  Usne  apne  ko  aur  apne 

doston  ko  dhokha  diya. 

11.  Main  apne  ko  bhul  guya. 

12.  Uske  pas  ko'i  nahm  jata. 

13.  Main  khauf  se  qarib  qa- 

rib  mar  g;aya. 

14.  Shay  ad  usne    mujh   se 

kaha  hog-a. 

15.  Usne  zarur  kiya  hog-a. 

16.  Jab  wuh  a'e   to   us  se 

kahna    ki :    Main    ne 
yeh  kiya  hai. 

17.  Jaisa  main_tumhen  ka- 

hun  vaisa  karo. 

18.  Itne  sust  mat  ho'o. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST. 


181 


India  has  three  hun- 
dred million  inhabi- 
tants. 

There  are  100  good  sol- 
diers in  this  regiment. 

We  have  sent  off  fifty 
letters  this  week. 

This  is  the  second  day 
of  the  month. 

The  third  day  is  a  holi- 
day, [day. 

The  seventh  day  is  Sun- 
Pay  will  be  given  on 
the  last  day. 

Who  has  brought  the 
deputy's  letter  ? 

The  messenger  is  here 

( = present)  your  honour. 

Tell  him  to  give  my 
best  compliments  to 
his  master. 

Well,  where  were  you 
yesterday  ? 

There  was  much  rain 
yesterday,  sir,  I  could 
not  come. 

Very  well,  sir,  I  will  do 
this  work. 

Let  the  gentleman  come 

in.  [gentleman. 

Bring  a  chair  for  the 


1.  Hindustan  men  tetis  ka- 

ror  raihnewale  (admi) 
hain. 

2.  Is  paltan  men  sau  ach- 

chhe  sipahi  hain. 

3.  Is  hafte  ham  ne  pachas 

khat  bheje  hain. 

4.  Mahine    ka    yen   dusra 

din  hai. 

5.  Tisre  din  chhutti  hai. 

6.  Satwen  din  itawar  hai. 

7.  Akhiri  din  tankhwah  di 

jaegri. 

8.  Dipt!  sahib   ki   chitthi 

kaun  laya  hai  ? 

9.  Huzur    chaprasi    hazir 

hai. 

10.  Kaho,   sahib   ko   bahut 

bahut  salam  bole. 

11.  Achchha,  kal  turn   ka- 

han  the  ? 

12.  Janab   kal   bahut  pani 

barasta  tha,  a  na  saka. 

13.  Bahut    achchha,  sahib, 

main_  yen   kam    kar- 
dung-a. 

14.  Sahib  ko  salam  do. 

15.  Sahib  ke  liye  kursi  la'o. 


132  HUGO*S  HINDUSTANI  MADE  EAST. 

PROGRESSIVE    READING, 

with  Literal  Translation  and  correct  English  Rendering. 


Hindustan     men     ghar     ke     bahar     ka     kam 
India  in          home      of        outside       of        work 

amuman    mard    hi    karte    hain.       Gaon     men 
generally          men      only    doing        are.          Villages        in 

auraten    bhi     kheton     men     baz     kam     karti 

women          also        fields  in          some      work        doing 

hain,       maslan,     bij     bona     aur     fasl     katna, 
are,          for  example,    seed    sowing      and       crop       cutting, 

vaghaira.       Shaihron     men     gharib    darje    ki 
etc.  Cities  in  poor  class       of 

auraten       bataur       am        mazdur    ke       rozi 
women       in  the  capacity    ordinary      labourers      of  livelihood 

kamati    hain.          Mohallon    men    aksar    aura- 
earning         are.        Residential  quarters  in        often        wo- 

ten    phul,    phal,    aur    sabzi   bechti  hain.    Yeh 

men    flowers,    fruit,      and    vegetables  sell.  These 

auraten    malin1    kaihlati    hain.        Abtak     au- 

women        gardeners        called          are.          Until  lately     wo- 

raton     ne     moharir?    kam     nahm    liya    hai. 
men          by  clerical          work        not          taken         is. 

Kharid-farokht    bhi    ziyadatar    mard  hi  karte 

Buying  and  selling        also  mainly          men    only     doing 

hain.       Isliye     bazaron     men     auraten     kam 
are.  Therefore     bazaar  in  women  less 

1  mall,  m.,  malin,  f.,  gardener  ; 
3  moharir,  clerk  :  moharirl,  clerical. 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE    EASY.  183 

dekhne    men    ati    hain.        Albatta          tirthofi 
sight  in    coming    are.      However,  places  of  pilgrimages 

par,    melon    men,    auraten    bakasrat  nazar  ati 
at,  fairs        in,  women        in  plenty         to  be  seen 

hain,     aur     khullam-khulla     purl      azadi      se 
are,  and  openly  full        freedom    with 

chalti    phirti    hain.       Rozana     isteshnon    par, 
moving    about      are.  Daily  stations  at, 

relg-ari        men      sab      darjon       ki       auraten 

railway  trains      in  all  classes         of  women 

bakhubi       dekhi       ja    sakti       hain.          Hin- 
fairly  well  seen  can  be.  In- 

dustan    men    khavind     bivi    ka    rishta     maz- 

dia  in  husband      wife      of       relation         reli- 

habi     mamla     khiyal  kiya  jata     hai. 
gious          matter  considered  is. 


Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 

In  India,  the  outside  work  is  generally  done  by  men  only. 
In  the  villages,  the  women  sometimes  do  some  of  the  work  in  the 
field,  such  as  sowing  the  seed  and  cutting  the  crops. 

In  the  cities,  the  women  of  the  poorer  class  earn  a  living  as 
ordinary  labourers  by  selling  flowers,  fruit  and  vegetables  in  the 
residential  quarters.  These  women  are  called  garde ners. 

Until  lately  clerical  work  was  not  done  by  women.  Buying 
and  selling  is  also  mainly  done  by  men.  Therefore  women  are 
not  much  seen  in  the  bazaars,  but  in  places  of  pilgrimage,  and  at 
fairs,  there  are  plenty  of  women  to  be  seen,  moving  about  quite 
freely  and  openly.  Daily,  at  railway  stations,  and  in  the  trains, 
women  of  all  classes  are  fairly  well  represented. 

In  India,  the  relation  between  husband  and  wife  is  looked 
upon  as  a  religious  matter. 


134  HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE    EASY. 

Hindustan    men    sab    mazhab    pae    jate    hain. 

India  in          all         religions          found  are. 

Un       men       se    mufassil-zail    bayan  ke  kabil 

Them   among   (—in)        the  following        mention    of     worthy 

hain.     Hindu    mazhab,      Islam,     Isai  mazhab, 

are.  Hinduism,  Mohammedanism,      Christianity, 

Pars!    mazhab.         Islam     ke      log-    Musalrnan 

the  Parsee  religion.         Mohammedanism  of  people      Moslems 

kaihlate     hain.       Hinduon     ki     tadad     Musal- 
called  are.  Hindus  of      number  Mos- 

manon,    Isaion,    Parsion    ki    mushtarka    tadad 

lerns,         Christians,         Parsees      of         combined         number 

se     bhi    ka'i    guna    ziyada    hai.       Hindustani 

than     of      many      times         more         is.  Indians 

aur    khaskar    Hindu     log     g-osht    kam    khate 

and    in  particular      Hindu      people      meat        little  eat. 

hain.    Hindu    gae    ke    gosht     se     aur     Musal- 
Hindu         cow's  flesh      from    and  Mos- 

xnan    su'ar    ke    gosht    se    sakht    parhez  karte 

^ms        pig's  flesh    from  strictly    abstinence     doing 

hain.      Baz    Hindu    gosht,    sharab    aur    andon 
are.         Several     Hindus      meat,  wine        and        eggs 

ko    bhi    istemal    karne    se    katai    inkar  karte 
of      also  using          from,  altogether  refusal     doing 

hain.     Logon    ki    am    ghiza    dudh,   makkhan, 
are.  People      of    usual      food        milk,  butter, 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   JiADK  EAST.  135 

ghi  anaj,     chaval,     phal,    tarkari,     va- 

clarified  butter,  corn,  rice,          fruit,     vegetables, 

ghaira    hain.       Amuman    har     Hindu     rozana 

etc.,  are.  Usually         every         Hindu  daily 

nahata    hai.       Har    Musalman     ek     din     men 
bathing        is.          Every         Moslem  one      day          in, 

panch       dafa       namaz       parhta       hai. 
five  times          prayers          reading  is. 


Correct  English  rendering  of  the  above. 

In  India  all  religions  are  found.  The  most  important  among 
these  are  the  following  :  Hinduism,  Mohammedanism,  Chris- 
tianity and  Parseeism. 

The  people  professing  Mohammedanism  are  called  Moslems 
(or  Muslims).  The  number  of  those  professing  Hinduism  is  far 
greater  than  the  combined  numbers  of  Moslems,  Christians  and 
Parsees.  Indians,  and  in  particular  the  Hindus,  eat  little  meat. 
Hindus  abstain  from  eating  beef,  Moslems  abstain  from  eating 
pork.  Many  Hindus  abstain  altogether  from  meat,  wine  and  eggs. 

The  usual  food  of  the  people  is  milk,  butter,  clarified  (or 
Indian)  butter,  corn,  rice,  fruit,  vegetables,  etc. 

The  Hindus  generally  bathe  once  a  day.  The  Moslems  say 
their  prayers  fire  times  each  day. 


Pahar     ki     tara'i     men  bahut     se    sher    aur 

Mountains  of        base          in  many        of      tigers      and 

hathi    hain.— Kabni  kabhi  sanp  makanon  men 

elephants  are.             Sometimes  snakes        houses             in 

chale    ate    hain.— Blialu  aur     tendue     pahari 

coming        are.         Bears  and       leopards             hillj 

mulk    men    raihte    hain 
country      in        living        are. 


186 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI  MADE   EAST. 


SHORT   VOCABULARIES  OF   USEFUL  NOUNS. 


THE  TOWN. — shaihar,  m. 

shai-har 

government  building_ 

sarkari  imarat,  f. 

sar-kah-ree  im-mah-rat 

custom  house 

chungi  giiar,  m. 

chune-guee  g'har 

post-office  dak  khana,  m. 

dahk  h'chah-iiah 

telegraph  office_ 

tar  g'har,  m. 

tahr  g'har 

hospital    shafa  khana,  m. 
or  aspatal,  m. 

shaf-ah  h'chah-nah,  as-pa-tahl 

church  girja,  m. 

guir-jah 

mosque  masjid,  f. 

mas-djid 

temple  maiidir,  m. 

man0-dir 

police  station    thana,  m. 

t'hah-nah 

court  of  law     adalat,  f . 

a-dah-lat 

civil  court 

divani  adalat,  f. 

dee-vah-nee  a-dah-lat 
criminal  court_ 

fauidari  adalat,  £. 

fawj-dah-ree  a-dah-lat 


revenue  court 

adalat  mal,  f. 

a-dah-lat  mahl 

prison          jel  khana,  m. 

jail  h'chah-nah 

shop  dukan,  f. 

doo-kahn 

road  sarak,  f, 

sa-rak 

street  gall,  f. 

gah-lee 


THE   HOTEL. — hotal,  m. 

hoh-tal 


waiter 


vay-tar 


vetar,  m. 


bill,  bill  of  fare     bil,  m. 
bill 

servant  naukar,  m. 

naw-kar 


tip 


in-ahm 


dahm 


inam,  m. 
i 

dam,  m. 


visitor          maihman,  m. 

mai'h-mahn 


first  floor 


paihli  maiizil,  f. 

pai'h-lce 


second  floor_ 

dusri  mafizil, 

doos-r 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE  EAST. 


187 


THE   RAILWAY.  —  Pel,  f. 

rayl 

station         isteshan,  m. 

is-tay-shun 

platform       pletfann,  m. 

playt-fahrm 
booking-office 

tikatghar,  m. 

tick-at-g'har 

ticket  tikat,  m. 

tick-at 

luggage        asbab,  m. 

as-bahb 

engine          ail  jan,  m. 


railway  carriage 

relgari,  f. 

rayl  gah-ree 

luggage  van      malgraxi,  f. 

mahl-gah-ree 

Station  master 

isteshan  mastar,  m. 

is-tay-shan  mahs-tar 

guard          gard,  m. 

gahrd 

porter  kllll,  m. 

ku-lee 

trunk,  box    trank,  m. 


express  train 

expres  gari,  f. 

ex-press  gah-ree 
mail  train      dak  grari,  f. 

dahk  gah-ree 

time-table     taimtebil,  m. 
taim-tay-bU 

H.S.—  5* 


SHIPPING.— j  ahazi. 

ja-hah-zee 

steamboat 
sailing-vessel 

ja-hahz 

man-of-war 

jangi  jahaz,  m. 

jan<r-guee  ja-hahz 
merchantman 

mail  or  tijarati  jahaz,  m. 

mah-lee  or  ti-jah-ra-tee  ja-hahz 

mast  patwar,  m. 

pat-wahr 

rope  rassi,  f . 

raa-see 

steward        stuard,  m. 

stoo-ard 

sailor  mallali,  m. 

mal-lah 

mate  met,  m. 

mayt 

captain          kaptan,  m. 

kap-tahn 

cabin  kamra,  m. 

kam-rah 


roof 
wall 


THE  HOUSE. — 

gliar,  makan,  m. 

g'har,  ma-kahn 

chhat,  f. 

ch'hat 

dlval,  f. 

dee-vahl 


floor  farsh,  m. 

farsh 
staircase        zina,m. 

zee-nah 

window       khirki,  £. 

k'hir-kee 


188 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI  MADE   EAST. 


THE  HOUSE  (continued) 

door  darvaza,  m. 

dar-vah-zah 
front  door 

samne  ka  darvaza,  m. 

sah  iii-nay  kali  dar-vah-zah 
dining-room 

khane  ka  kamra,  m. 

k'hah-nay  kab  kam-rah 

drawing-room     baithak,  f. 

bait-hak 

bedroom 

sone  ka  kamra,  m. 

soh-nay  kah  ka.u-rah 
study 

parline  ka  kamra,  m. 

[i!ir-h'n;iy  kah  kam-rah 

bathroom,  lavatory 

g&usul  khana,  m. 

h'ru-sul  k'chith-nah 

office  daftar,  m. 

daf-tar 

garden  bagil,  m. 

bah'r 

flower  garden  _ 

phul  bag&,  m. 

p  bool  bah'r 

orchard         bagilTcha,  m. 

bah-h'rec-chah 


FURNITURE. — saman,  m. 

sah-rnahn 

table  mez,  f. 

mayz 

chair  kursi,  f. 

kur-see 

armchair      aram  kursi,  f . 

ah-rahm  kur-see 


writing  table 

likhne  ki  mez,  f. 

lik'h-nay  kee-mayz 

picture  tasvir,  f. 

tas-veer 

ornaments         zevar,  m. 
zay-var 

curtains  parda,  m. 

par-dah 

carpet    farsh,  m.,  dari,  f. 

farsh,  da-ree 

matting  chata'l,  f. 

cha-tah-ee 

mirror  shisha,  m. 

shee-shah 

desk  desk,  m. 

desk 

lamp  chirag'h,,  m. 

chir-ah'r 

bed  charpai,  f. 

chahr-pah-ee 

stove  chulha,  m. 

chool-hah 

sofa  sofa,  m. 

soh-fah 

store-room        godam,  m. 

goh-dahm 


THE    BODY. — 

jism,  badan,  m. 


head 


jism,  ba-dan 

sar,  m. 


forehead  peshani,  t 

pay-shah-nee 

hair  bal,  m. 

bahl 

ear  kan,  m. 

kahn 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST. 


189 


THK  BODY  (continued). 

ere  ankh,  f. 

ah»fk'b 

nose  nak,  f. 

nshk 

month  munh,  m. 

mu»*  h 

face  chehra,  m. 

chay'h-rah 

tooth  dant,  m. 


cheek      rukhsar,  gal,  m. 

ruh'ch-sahr,  gahl 

neck  gardan,  f. 

gar-dan 

shoulder  kandha,  m. 

ka»v-d'hah 

arm  bazu,  m. 

bah-zoo 

hand  hath,  m. 

haht'h 

finger  ungll,f. 

nof-lee 

thumb  ang'utha.  m. 

a«f-goo-t'hah 

nail  nakhun,  m. 

nah-h'choon 

cheat  chhati,  £. 

ch'hah-tee 

stomach       meda,  pet,  m 

may-dah,  payt 

heart  dil,  m. 

dill 

leg  tang,  f  . 


foot  pair,  paon,  m. 

payr,  pah-o»f 

knee  ghutna,  m. 

g'hut-nah 


paw 
tail 


pafija,  m. 

pa«*-jah  _ 

punchh,  f. 

h  h 


BATING   AND   DRINKING, 

khana,  pma 

k'hah-iiah,  pee-nah 

food  khana,  m. 

k'hab-nah 

breakfast 

subah  ka  khana* 

(=morning  food) 

su-bab  kaii  k'hah-nah 

dinner  sham  ka^hana  m. 
or  byalu,  f. 

(^evening  food) 

shabm  kah  k'hah-nah,  b'yat-loo 

tea       cha,  f. 

cbah 

coffee  kahava,  m. 

ka-ha-vah 

chocolate      chaklet,  f. 

chahk-layt 

wine,  beer    sharab,  f. 

(any  intoxicant)         sha-rahb 

soup  shorba,  m. 

shohr-bah 

bread  rotl,  f. 

rob-tee 

meat  gosht,  m. 

gohsht 

cheese  chlZ,  f. 

cheez 

eggs  ande,  m. 

a»fl-day 

milk  dudh,  m. 

dood'b 


'Two  other  names  for  breakfast  are 
(cb'boh-tee  hah-ri-ree,  ka-lay-wah)  ; 


chhotl  hazirt,  f.,  and  kalewa,  m. 

any  of  these  names  also  apply  to  lunch 


140 


HUGO  8   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


EATING,  DBINKINO  (continued) 

butter  makkhan,  m. 

mak-k'han 

Indian  or  clarified 
butter        ghi,  in. 

g'hce 

fruit  phal,  m. 

p'hal 

vegetables     tarkari,  f. 

tar-kah-ree 

sweetmeats  mith.a'1,  f. 

mit-hah-ee 


TRADES.—  tijarat,  f. 

ti-jah-rat 

basati 

ba-sah-tee 
greengrocer  kunjra 


grocer 


fruiterer       mewafarosh. 

may-wah-fa-rosh 

butcher         kasa'l 

kas-ah-ee 

baker  tanurwala,  _ 

rotiwala 

tan-oor-vah-lah,  roh-tee-vah-lah 

milkman       grhosi 

g'hoh-see 

provision  merchant 

bani'a 

ba-ni-ah 

fisherman     mahlgir, 

machhua 

mah-hee-gueer,  mach-hu-ah 

fishmonger  machliliwala 

mach'li-lee-vah-lah 

confectioner    halwa'l 

hal-wah-ee 

cook  bavarchi 

bah-var-chee 


water  carrier 

bhishti,  sakka 

b'hibh-tee,  sak-kah 

gardener       mall 
mah-lee 

carpenter      barh.a'l 

bar-ha-t:e 

mason          memar 

may-mail  r 

blacksmith    lohar 

loh-hahr 

goldsmith     sunar 

sun-ahr 

jeweller       jauharf 

jaw-ha-ree 

bootmaker     mochl 

moh-chee 

tailor  darzi 

dar-zee 

cloth  merchant     bajaz 

ba-jahz 

washerman    dliobl 
d'hoh-bee 

cowherd       gadariya 

ga-da-re-yah 


UTENSILS  AND  TOOLS. 
,  m.  (aw-zahr) 


plate        thali,  rakabi,  f  . 

t'hah-lee,  rak-ah-bee 

lota,  m. 
loh-tah 


ug 
glass 


gllas,  m. 

gui-lahs 

cup  pyala,  m. 

p'yah-lah 

spoon  chammacli,  £. 

cham-madch 
knife  Chaku,  m. 

chah-koo 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE   EASY. 


141 


UTENSILS,  TOOLS  (continued) 

fork  kanta,  m. 

kahn^-tah 

hammer         hathaura,  m. 

hat'h-aw-rah 

saw  ara,  m. 

ah-rah 

screw  pech,  m. 

paych 

screwdriver     pechkas,  m. 

paych-kas 

nails  kll,  f. 

keel 

ruler  rul,  f. 

rool 

spade  khurpT,  f. 

k'hur-pee 

scissors        kainch.1,  f. 

kainp-chee 

razor  astura,  m. 

as-too-rah 


WRITING   MATERIALS. 

likhne  ka  saman. 

lik'h-nay  kah  sah-mahn 

paper  kaghaz,  m. 

kah-h'raz 

letter  papej 

chitthi  ka  kagiiaz,  m. 

chit-t'hee  kah  kah-h'raz 

blotting  paper     SOkhta,  m. 

soh'ch-tah 

envelope       lifafa,  m. 

lif-ah-fah 

pen      kalam  or  qalam,  f. 

ka-lam 

pencil  pensil,  f. 


inkstand        davat,  f. 

dah-vaht 


postage  stamp_ 

dak  tikat,  m. 

dahk  tick-at 

seal  xnuhar,  f. 

mu-har 
note  book     notbuk,  f. 

noht-buk 

pocket  book  paketbuk,  f. 

pah-kayt-buk 

diary  dayari,  f . 

dah-ya-ree 


COLOURS.  —  rang,  m. 


blue 

red 

green 

yellow 

grey 

orange 

black 

white 


^ 

nila 

nee-lah 

surkh,  lal 

surh'ch,  lahl 

sabz,  hara 

sabz,  ha-rah 

zard,  pila 

zard,  pee-lah 

bhura 

b'hoo-rah 

narangi  rafig1 

nah-ran<r-guee  ra»wg 

kala,  syah 

kah-lab,  s'yah 

sufed 

su-fayd 


THE  ARMY.— failj,  t 

fawdj 

general  janaral 

dja-na-ral 

colonel  karnal 

kar-nal 

major  rnejar 

may-djar 


142 


HUGOS  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


THE  ARMY  (continued) 

captain  kaptan 

kap-tahn 

officer  afsar 

af-sar 

regiment          paltan,  f. 

pal-tan 

foot  soldier       sipahi 

si-pah-hee 

horse  soldier     sawar 
sa-wahr 

cavalry     grlmr  sawar,  m. 

g'hur  sa-wah 

infantry  pyada,  in. 

p'yah-dah 

Hag,  standard    jhafida,  m. 

dj'hanj-dali 


tent 
uniform 


khima,  m. 

h'chee-mali 


var-dee 


vardi,  f . 


barracks  barak,  m. 

bah-rak 

to  march     Chalna,  or 

ruldisat  hona 

chal-nah,  ruh'ch-sat  hoh-nah 

war,  battle  lara'i,  jangr,  f. 

lar-ah-ee,  dja«sg 

attack  hamla,  m. 

ham-lah 

cannon  top,  f. 

tohp 


gun  banduk,  f. 

ban0-dook 

sword  talwar,  f . 

tal-wahr 

bullet  goll,  f. 

goh-lee 

powder  barud,  f. 

bah-rcxxi 

shot  chharra,  m. 

ch'har-rah 

ammunition  g"Ola  barud,  m. 

goh-lah  bah-rood 


TITLES,*  PROFESSIONS,  etc. 

khitab,  m.,  peshe,  m., 
vagliaira 

h'che-tahb,  pay-shay,  va-h'rai-rah 

king      raja,  badshah 

rah-jah,  bahd-shah 

queen    rani,  malka 

rah-nee,  mal-kah 

prince   rajkumar, 

shahzada 

rahj-ku-mahr,  shah-zah-dah 

princess    rajkumari,_ 
shahzadi 

rahj-ku-mah-ree,  shah-zah-dee 

heir  apparent 

yuvaraj,  wall 

yu-vah-rahj,  va-lee 

judge       jaj,  munsif 

jadj,  muii-sif 


•INDIAN  TITLES — beginning  at  the  lowest  rank.     These  cannot  be 
translated  into  English. 

Rai  (rab-e),  Rao  (rah'o),  Khan  (h'chahn)  ;  Rai  Bahadur  (rah-e 
ba-hah-dur),  Rao  Bahadur  (rah-oh  ba-hah-dur),  Dlwan  Bahadur  (di- 
vahn  bah-hah-dur),  Khan  Bahadur  (h'chahn  ba-hah-dur)  ;  Raja  (rah- 
jah),  Maharaja  (ma-hah-rah-jah),  Nawab  (na-vahb). 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


143 


TITLES,  PBOFKSSIONS  (continued) 

lawyer,  solicitor     vakil 
va-keel 

lawyer's  clerk     muharir 

mu-hah-rir 

priest  purohit 

pur-oh-htt 

doctor       hakim,  daktar 

hak-eein,  dahk-tar 

teacher      guru,  mastar,_ 
parhanewala 

gu-roo,  mahs-tar, 

par-hah-uay-vah-lah 


bank 


BANKING,  etc. 

bank,  f. 


bank-manager_ 

bank  ka  menejar 

bangk  kah  may- nay- jar 
bank-clerk 

bank  ka  munshi 

ban0k  kah  mun-shee 

cash  nakd,  m. 

nakd 


loan 


karz,  udhar,  m. 

karz.  ud-hahr 


cheque,  draft 

chek,  hundi,  f. 

cneck,  hu«y-dee 
currency  note 

karansi  not,  m. 

ka-ranfl-see  noht 

money  rupaya,  m. 

ru-pa-yah 


MONEY  VALUES. 


mpaya    silver  coin  and  paper  =  Is.  4d.  at  par. 

roo-pa-yah 

athanm    silver  and  nickel  coin =8  annas,   nominally  8d. 
at'h-an-nee 

chawanm  „  „          =4  annas          „          4d. 

chaw-an-ne« 

dawanni  „  „          =2  annas          „          2d. 

daw-an-nee 

ekanni     nickel  coin  =1  anna  „  Id. 

ayk-an-nee 
adhanni  copper  coin      =^  anna  „  id. 

ad'h-au-nee  (size  of  a  penny) 

paisa  copper  coin       =J  anna  „  Jd. 

pai-sah  (size  of  a  halfpenny) 

pa5!     copper  coin  =      one  twelfth  anna     one  twelfth  Id. 
pah-ee  (not  much  used,  except  in  calculations) 

muhar  sovereign  (gold  coin)  nominally  £l. 

mu-har 

pafich  mpaye  ka  not        a  five-rupee  note 
das  rupaye  ka  not  »  ten-rupee  note 

bis  rupaye  ka  not  a  twenty-rupee  note 

and  go  on,  notes  of  30,  40,  50,  100,  500,   1,000,  10,000  rupees. 


144 


HUGO  S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


LIST    OF    INDISPENSABLE    WORDS, 
ADVERBS,  PRONOUNS,  PREPOSITIONS,    CONJUNCTIONS   AND 
IDIOMATIC  EXPRESSIONS. 


about  karfb 

ka-reeb 

above  all      sab  se  paihle 

sab  se  pai'h-lay 

across  par 

pahr 

after  bad 

bahd 

afterwards    bad  ko 
bahd  ko 

again  phir 

p'hir 

against  khilaf 

h'chi-lahf 

all  sab,  kul 

sab,  kul 

almost         karib  karib 

ka-reeb  ka-reeb 

aloud          zor  se 

zohr  say 

already          paihle  111 
pai'b-lay  bee 

also  bhi 

b'bee 

although      groya 

goh-yah 

always          hamesha 

ha-may-sbab 


and 


aur 


apparently   dekhne  men 

dayk'h-nay  may««r 

as  jaise 

jai-say 
as  much,  as  many     itna 

it-nab 


as  much  as    itna . . .  j  itna 

it-nah  jit-nab 

at  all  events  JO  ho 

job  hob 

at  least        kam  se  kam 

kam  say  kam 

at  most  ziyada  se  ziyada 

ze-yah-dah  say  ze-yah-dah 

at  once         ekdam 

ayk-dam 

at  present     aj  kal 

ahj  kal 

at  that  time      US  vakt 
us  vakt 

because  chunk] ,  isliye  ki 

choo»0-kee,  is-li-yay  ke 

behind  pichhe 

peech-hay 

besides  alawa 

al-ah-wah 

beyond          bad 
babd 

both  donon 

doh-rio»i<r 

but  lekin,  balki 

lay -kin,  bal-ke 

by  se 

say 

by  chance     ittifakan 

it-ti-fah-kan 

by  no  means_ 

kisi  tarah  nahin 

kis-ee  ta-rah  na-heen» 

constantly    hamesha, 

kadam  kadam  par 

ha-may-shah,  ka-dam  par 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


145 


close  to        pas,  nazdik 

pahs  naz-deek 

each  bar 

bar 

early  jaldl 

jal-dee 

either. ..or     ya...ya 

yah.. .yah 

elsewhere      aur  jagah 

awr  jah-gah 

enough          kafl 

kah-fee 

entirely         bilkul 
bil-kul 

especially      khas  kar 

h'chalis  kar 

even  if          agarche 

a-gar-chay 

ever,  always     hamesha 

ha-may-shah 

everywhere  har jagah. 

har-ja-gah 

exactly          bilkul  thlk 

bil-kul-t'heek 

exceedingly  nihayat 

ni-hah-yat 

except         sivaya 

si-vah-yah 

few,  a  few    chand 

channel 

finally      ant  men,  akhir 

ant  maynff,  ah-h'chir 

first  awwal 

av-val 

for  liye 

le-yay 

formerly       paihle 

pai'h-lay 

forward         age 

»h-gay 


from  86 

say 

generally       am  taur  par 

ahm  tawr  par 

hardly  mushkil  SO 

mush-kil  say 

hence          yahan  se 

ya-hahrifl  say 

hereupon       is  par 

is  par 

here  and  there 

jahan  tahafl 

ja-hahn0  ta-hahny 

how  ?          kaise  ? 

kai-say 

however,  but    lekin 

lay-kin 

if  agar 

a-gar 

immediately     fauran 
faw-ran 

in  men 


in  case  agar 

a-gar 

indeed  bhl,  zarur 

b'hee,  za-roor 

in  front  of    samne 

sahm-nay 

in  future      ayinda 

ah-yi»i/-da)i 

inside  andar 

an-dar 

instead  of     bajaya 

ba-djah-ya 

in  the  same  way 

jyon  ka  tyofl 

kah  t'yow? 

just,  just  now    abhi 

ab-hee 


146 


HUGOS   iilJSDUBXAAl   ALAbE 


last 


akhiri 

ahk-he-ree 

left  (to  the)   baym  taraf 

ba-yeenfl  ta-raf 

lifelong        zindgi  bhar 

zinfld-^uee  b'har 

like,  as          ki  tarah. 

kee  ta-rali 

mutually      apas  men 

ah-  pas  mayn0 

near  nazdik 

naz-deek 

neither  .  .  .  nor     na  .  .  .  na 
na...na 

never  kabhi  nahin 

kab-hee  na-hee*y 

nevertheless      is  par  bh.1 
is  par  b'hee 

no  nahin 

na-heen? 

none,  not  any  ko'i  nahin 

ko-ee  na-heen<r 

nothing        kuchh  nahin 

kuch'h  na-hee»v 
now  ab 

ab 

nowhere       kahin  nahin 


of  ka 

kah 

of  course      zarur  h.1 

za-roor  hee 

often  aksar 

ak-sar 
on,  upon       par 

par 

on  account  of  kl  wajah  S6 

kee  va-djah  say 

only  sirf 

sir! 
on  the  contrary  bar  khilaf 

bar  h'chi-lahf 

«r  ya 

yah 


otherwise     varna 

var-nah^ 

outside         bahar 

bah-hav 

perhaps        shayad 

shah -y ad 

privately      akele  mefl 

a-kay-lay  maynj 

quickly          jaldl 
jal-dee 

quite  bilkul 

bil-kul 

rather  balki 

bal-ke 

right  (to  the)  dahini  taraf 

dali-lii-nee  ta-raf 

scarcely        mushkil  se 

mush-kil  say 

seldom         bahut  kam 

ba-htit  kam 

several           ka'l 
ka-ee 

shortly,  briefly 

mukhtasir  taur  par 

muh'ch-ta-sir  tawr  par 
since  se 

^y  -^ .  A- 
slowly         ahista 

ah-his-tah 

so  that         jis  men 

jis  may*!? 

so  is  tarah 

is  ta-rah 

some,  any     ko'l,  kuchh 

koh-ee  kuch'h 

some,  a  little    kuchh 
kuch'h 

somehow  or  other 

jaise  taise 

jai-say  tai-say 

something     kuchh 
kuch'h 

sometimes     bazvakt 

bahz-vakt 


HUGO  8   HINDUSTANI   MADE    EASY. 


147 


some  whore  or  other 

kahin  na  kahin 

ka-huenp  na  ka-heeng 

so  much,  so  many     Utna 
ut-nah 

soon  jaldl 

jal-dee 

still  abhi,  tobhi 

ab-hee  toh-b'hee 

suddenly   bat  hi  bat  men 

baht  hee  baht-mayny 

surely       zarur,  beshak 

za-roor  bay-shak 

than  S6 

say 

then  tab 

tab 

therefore       isliye 
is-le-yay 

thereupon     is  par 

is  par 

though        groya 

gob -yah 

through        se,  se  ho  kar 

say,  say  ho  kar 

three  days  ago     tarson 
tar-son? 

thus  is  tarah 

is-ta-ra 
together        ikattha 

ik-at-t'hah 

too  (much)   nihayat 

ni-hah-yat 

towards        taraf 

ta-raf 

truly          sach  much 

sach  much 

two  days  ago    parson. 

par-son? 

under  niche 

nee-chay 


undoubtedly 

ho  na  ho,  beshak 

boh  nan  hob,  bay-shak 

unless       agar  .  .  .  nahm 

agur...na-heen<r 

until  tak 

tele 

usually        amuman 

a-moo-man 

what  ?         kya  ? 

k'yah  ? 
whatever       kuchh  bhl 

kuch'h  bhee 

when  ?          kab  ? 

kab? 

when  jab 

jab 

whereas       chunki 

choonfl-kee 
wherever      jahafi  kahin 

ja-hahny  Ka-heenj 

while  (during)     men 
mayx? 

who  ?  which  ?  kaun  ?  kis  ? 

kawn  ?  kis  ? 

who,  which  JO,  jis 
job,  jis 

whoever  ko'l  bhl,  JO  kol 

koh'ce  b'hee,  job  koh-ec 

whole,  the     kul 
why  ?          kyun  ? 

k'yootij 

with  SO 

say 

without        baghair 


yes 
yet 


han 


abhl 

ab-bfH- 


148 


HUGO  S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


IDIOMATIC     PHRASES. 


Come  what  may. 
At  ull  events. 
It  may  happen. 
It  is  the  truth. 
Hearing  is  better  than 

speaking. 
Patience  is  an   excellent 

quality. 
The     fruit    of     rashness 

is  repentance. 
To  the  wise    a    hint     is 

enough. 

Fortune      does    not    in- 
crease with  wisdom. 
Man   has   reason,  a    brute 

has  none. 
This  is    the    best    of    all 

(= better  than  all). 
Never  mind. 
As  soon  as  possible. 
As     one     sows,    so    one 

reaps. 
All     is    well    that     ends 

well. 

Time  is  money. 
Learn  it  by  heart. 
At     the      point     of     the 

sword. 
If  it  is  to  be  done,  do  it 

at  once. 


Jo  chahe  ho. 

Har  taur  par. 

Yeh  ho  sakta  hai. 

Yeh  sach  hai. 

Sunna  behtar  hai  kaihne 

se. 
Sabr    achchhi     khaslat 

hai. 
Jaldi  ka  phal  pashema- 

ni  hai. 
Akil  ko  ishara  kafi  hai. 

Dana'i  se  daulat  nahm 

barhti. 
Aki  admi  ko  hot!  hai, 

janvar  ko  nahm. 
Yeh  sab  se  behtar  hai. 

Kuchh  parva  nahm. 
Jitni  jaldi  ho  sake. 
Jaisa  boye,  vaisa  kate. 

Jiska  natij'a  achchha  hai 

wuh  sab  achchha. 
Vakt  hi  daulat  hai. 
Ise  zubani  yad  kar  dalo. 
Talwar  ke  zor  se. 

Agur  yeh  karna  hai,  to 
fauran  karo. 


HUGO  S  HINDUSTANI   JIADK    KiSY. 


149 


COMMERCIAL     PHRASES. 


Take    this    draft,    and 

bring  the  money. 
Be    quick,    so    that    I 

may  have  the  money 

in  time. 
Let  me  have  the  money 

by  twelve  o'clock. 
The  money   must  now 

be  sent  to  Mr.  — . 
What  is    the   price    of 

rice  now  ? 
Do     not     buy     to-day, 

wait  till  to-morrow. 
Do      you      understand 

business  ? 
I  am  not  easily  imposed 

upon. 

I  cannot  understand  the 

bazaar  prices. 
The      bazaar      rate     is 

never    the  same   for 

two  hours. 
Have     you     compared 

these  things  with  the 

sample  ? 
Do  the  goods  and  the 

sample  agree  ? 
They  do  not  agree. 
The  goods  are  inferior 

to  the  sample. 


Yeh  hundi  le  jao  aur 

rupaya  le  ao. 
Tezi  karo  jis   men    ki 

mujlie  vakt  par   ru- 

paya mil  jae. 
Barah  baje  tak  mujlie 

rupaya  mil  jae. 
Ab  rupaya  Mistar  —  ke 

pas  bhejna  chahiye. 
Ab    chaval     ka    dam 
_  (bhav)  kya  hai  ? 
Aj  mat  kharido,kal  tak 

intizar  karo. 
Kya    turn    tijarat    sa- 

majhte  ho? 
Mujlie  jaldi  dhokha  na- 

hin  diya  -ja  sakta. 
Bazar  ke  dam  meri  sa- 

majh  men  nahm  ate. 
Bazar  ki  dar  do  ghante 

tak  to  zarur  wahi  ra- 


Kya  turn  ne  in  chizon 

ko  namune  se  mila- 

ya  hai  ? 
Kya  saman  aur  namu- 

na  ek  se  hain  ? 
Ve  ek  se  nahm  haifi. 
Saman  namune  se  gha- 

tiya  hat 


150 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


Two  or  three  packages 
are  superior. 

Get  a  pass  for  the  goods 
to  be  shipped. 

How  much  money  was 
collected  yesterday  ? 

Bring  the  goods  in  carts 
from  the  custom- 
house. 

When  Mr.  —  comes,  tell 
him  I  want  to  speak 
to  him. 

How  long  are  those 
goods  to  remain  in 
the  custom-house  ? 

Sir,  I   have    not    got  the 
invoice,      how     can      I 
get  them  out  ? 
There    are    different  rates 
of     duty    for    different 
goods. 
I     cannot  (myself)    open 

the  boxes. 

The  custom-house  offi- 
cer is  here  to  open 
the  packages. 

I      will      sign     the     in- 
voice. 
The     things    cannot     be 

sent  without  a  pass. 
They    promised    to    send 
the  goods  to-morrow. 


Do    tin   puriya    behtar 

hain. 
Jahaz  se  saman  bhejne 

ke  liye  pas  le  ao. 
Kal_kitna  rupaya  ikat- 

tha  kiya  graya  ? 
Chungi   g-har   se   asbab 

gari  par  le  ao. 

Jab  Mr.  —  ae,  to  kaihna 
ki^  main  us  se  bat  kar- 
na  chahta  hun. 

Wuh  asbab  chungi  ghar 
men  kab  tak  raheg-a  ? 

Sahib,  mere  pas  bilti  na- 
hm,  men   unko  kaise 
chhura  sakta  hun  ? 
Mukhtalif  saman  ke  liye 
chungi   ki   mukhtalif 
dar  hain. 
Main  khud    bakson   ko 

nahm  khol  sakta. 
Chungi  ka  afsar  yahan 
bandalon  ko  kholne  ke 
liye  hai. 
Main  bilti  par  dastkhat 

kar  dung*a. 
Chizen  bina  pas  ke  na- 

hin  bheji  ja  saktm. 
Unhon    ne    kal    saman 
bhejne  ka  wada  kiya 
hai. 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST. 


151 


Have  you  collected  all  the 

bills  ? 
His  affairs  are  in  a  bad 

state. 
He  has  called  his  creditors 

together. 
Is  the  cargo  damaged  ? 

This  man  deals  honestly 
with  everybody. 

The  goods  you  have  pur- 
chased are  very  dear. 

You   have   been   deceived 

by  this  man. 
He  cannot  pay  his  debts. 

The  articles  purchased  on 
the  loth  of  this  month 
have  not  been  delivered. 

Tell    me    the    amount   of 

what  is  due.  [rect. 

The  accounts  are  not  cor- 

Everything  is  in  confusion. 

See  to  it  that  the  books 
are  kept  properly. 

In  answer  to  your  letter 
of  the  3rd  inst. 

I  am  in  receipt  of  your 
Jotter  of  the  1st  ult. 


Kya  turn  ne  sab  bil  ja- 
ma kar  liye  hain  ? 

Uska  hai  garbar  hai. 

TJsne    apne_  mahajanofi 

ko  bulaya  hai. 
Kya_saman  ko   nuksan 

hua  hai  ? 
Yeh  admi  sab  ke  sath 

iman  rakhta  hai. 
Jo  saman  turn  ne  khari- 

da  hai  wuh  bahut  ma- 

hanga  hai. 
Tum_is  admi  se  dhokha 

kha  gaye. 
Wuh  karz  ada  nahm  kar 

sakta. 
Is  ^nahme   ki    pandrah 

tarikh  ko  kharidT  hui 

chizen    dakhil    nahin 

ki  gray!  hain. 
Mujhe    batao   ki   kitna 

dena  hai. 

Hisab  thik  nahm  hai. 
Sab  garbar  hai. 

Dekho  hisab  ki  kitabefl 
thik  thik  rakhi  jaen. 

Tisri  tarikh  ke  tumhare 
khat  ke  jawab  men 

Mu.jhe  akh.iri  mahine  ki 
paihli  tarikh  ka  khat 
mila. 


152 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI  MADE  EASY. 


I  have  the  pleasure  to  in- 
form you. 

Please  send  it  to  me  by 
return  of  post. 

I  hope  to  receive  it  by 
the  7th. 

In  your  letter  you  pro- 
mised us  a  discount  of 
5  per  cent. 

You  have  only  taken  off 

2%  per  cent. 
I  will  send  you  a  cheque 

as  soon  as  I  receive  the 

goods. 
We  shall  be  much  obliged 

to  you. 
Please  let  me  know  your 

lowest  terms  for  cash. 

How  much  will  the  duty 

amount  to  (=be)  ? 
The  bill  is  payable  at  sight. 

We      cannot     wait     any 

longer. 
Send  in  my    account    as 

soon  as  possible. 
The  firm  has  failed. 

The  Bank-rate  is  down. 
There  is  an  error  in  your 
account. 


Mujhe  ap  ko  yeh  batane 
men  khushi  hai. 

Maiharbani  kar  ke  iau- 
tati  dak  se  mujhe  yeh 
bhej  dena. 

Main  sat  tarikh  tak  pane 
ki  ummid  karta  nun. 

Apne  khat  men  ap  ne 
panch  fi  sadi  batta 
dene  ka  wada  kiya  hai. 

Ap_ne  sirf  dha'i  fi  sadi 

kata  hai. 
Saman    pate    hi,    main 

chek  bhej  dunga. 

Ham  ap  ke  bahut  shukr 

gnzar  honge. 
Maiharbani  kar  ke  apni 

sasti  se  sasti  nakd  dar 

batla'iye. 
Chungi  kitni  hog-i  ? 

Yeh  darsani  hundi  hai. 

Ham    ab   zyada  intizar 

nahin  kar  sakte. 
Mera  hisab  bhejo,  jitni 

jaldi  ho  sake. 
Karkhane_ka  devala  nl- 

kal  gaya  hai. 
Bank  ki  dar  kam  hai. 
Tumhare  hisab  men  ek 

ghalati  hai. 


HUGO  S  HINDUSTANI  MADE    EASY. 


153 


Give  me  a  receipt. 
I  have  a  letter  of  recom- 
mendation. 
The  samples  are  delayed. 

Give    me    your     estimate 

(=rates). 
Send    the    goods    by    fast 

train. 
Can  I  insure  the  goods  ? 

Your  esteemed  order  duly 
to  hand. 

No  invoice  was  sent  with 
the  goods. 

We  hasten  to  inform  you. 

We  will  allow  you  a  re- 
duction of  10  per  cent. 

Your  orders  must  be  fairly 
large. 

I  sold  the  goods  at  a  large 
profit. 

We  hope  the  above  prices 
and  terms  will  suit  you. 

May  we  hope  that  you 
will  shortly  favour  us 
with  an  order  ? 

We  can  either  charter  a 
whole  steamer,  or  part, 
as  it  suits  you  best. 


Mujhe  rasld  do. 

Mere    pas  ek  sifarashi 

chitthi  hai. 
Namune  bhejne  men  der 

ho  g-ayi. 
Mujhe  apna  bhav  batao. 

Saman  tez  g-ari  se  bhej- 

na. 

Kya  saman  ka  bima  ka- 
_  ra  sakta  hun  ? 
Apia  farma'ish  mill. 

Saman  ke  sath  bilti  na- 
hm  bheji  gayi  thi. 

Ham  ap  ko  itla  dete  ham. 

Ham  apko  das  fi  sadi 
batta  deng-e. 

Ap  ki  mang  kafi  bari 
honi  chahiye. 

Main  ne  mal  bare  mu- 
nafe  par  becha. 

Hamen  ummid  hai  ki 
upar  ke  dam  aur  shar- 
tenap  ke  muaflk  hongi. 

Kya  ham  ummid  karen 
ki  ap  jald  hi  hukm 
inayat  karenge  ? 

Ham  sara  jahaz  ya  ek 
hissa  kiraya  kar  sakte 
hain.  jaisa  ap  ke  mua- 
fikho. 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE    EAST. 


I  shall  pay  on  receipt  of 
the  goods. 

We  have  made  every 
effort  to  execute  your 
order. 

Will  yon  kindly  let  us 
know  by  return  of  post  ? 

Please  accept  our  best 
thanks  for  this  favor. 

There  was  a  good  trade 
done  in  that  village. 

Our  market  is  still  very 
quiet. 

There  is  little  hope  of  an 
early  change. 

The  demand  is  not  yet 
strong  enough. 

We  hope  to  obtain  a 
better  price  in  a  week. 

Speculators  have  for  the 
moment  seized  on  this 
article. 

Nobody  can  tell  how  the 
market  will  turn  out. 

If  a  considerable  change 
takes  place,  we  shall  in- 
form you  by  cable. 

Prices  will  fall  consider- 
ably in  a  few  days. 


Mal_ane  par  main  dam 
dungra. 

Ap  ka  hukm  bajane  men 
ham  ne  purl  koshish 
ki  hai. 

Kya  lauta_ti  dak  se  itla 
dene  ki  inayat  kareng-e  ? 

Is  inayat  ke  liye  hamara 
bahut  shukriya  kabul 
kijiye. 

Us  g-aoii  men  achchhi 
tijarat  hui. 

Hamara  Jmzar  abhi  ba- 
hut khamosh  hai. 

Jaldi  badalne  ki  bahut 
kam  ummid  hai. 

Abhi  mang  kafi  nahin 
hai. 

Ek  hafte  men  ham  beh- 
tar  dam  pane  ki  um- 
mid karte  hain. 

Is  vakt  sattewalofi  ne  is 
chiz  par  kabza  kar 
liya  hai. 

Ko'ijiahin  kah _sakta  ki 
bazar  ki  kya  halat  hogri. 

Agar  achchha  fark_hua 
to_ham  ap  ko  tar  se 
itla  deiige. 

Kuchh  dinon^  men  dam 
bahut  gir  jaenge. 


HUGO'B  HINDUSTANI   MADE  EASY. 


156 


The  mone  y  market  is  very 
firm. 

We  must  be  prepared  for 
still  dearer  money. 

The  value  of  the  rice  and 
wheat  exported  last  week, 
amounted  to  half  a  mil- 
lion rupees  more  than 
the  previous  week. 

It  is  essential  to  ship  the 
goods  at  the  lowest  pos- 
sible rate. 

The  date  of  the  arrival 
does  not  matter  much. 

Do  not  forget  to  insure 
the  goods. 

We  think  there  will  short- 
ly be  a  very  great  de- 
mand for  cotton  in  this 
country. 

Our  present  supply  will 
not  be  sufficient  to  meet 
the  demand. 

We  propose  entering  into 
another  speculation  with 
you,  on  equal  terms. 

We  herewith  send  you 
invoice  for  goods  or- 
dered on  the  5th  inst. 

We  are  sending  them  off 
by  ship  to-day. 


Rupaye_ka  bazar  bahut 

mazbut  hai. 
Is  se  bhi  meheng-e  ru- 

paye_  ke  liye  hamen 
_  taiyar  raihna  chahiye. 
Akhiri  haf te  bahar  bhej  e 

hue  chaval  aur  g-ehun 

ki  kimat  paihle  hafte 

ke  banisbat  panch  lakh 

rupaye  ziyada  thi. 
Yeh  nihayat  zaruri  hai 

ki  mal  kam  se  kam  dar 
_  par  jahaz  sebheja  ja'e. 
Amad  ki  tarikh  ki  kol 

bat  nahin. 
Mal  ka  bima  karana  mat 

bhulna. 
Hamara  khiyal  hai  ki 

kuchh  din  men  hi  is 

mulk  mefi  rui  ki  ban 

mang  hogri. 
Hamara  maujuda  saman 

mang  ke  liye  kafi  na 

hoga. 
Hamara  irada^  hai  ki  ap 

ke  sath  barabar  hisson 

men     ek     aur    satta 

karen. 
Panchvi  tarikh  ko  man- 

ga'e  hue  mal  ki  bilti 

ham  bhejte  hain. 
Ham  aj_unhen  jahaz  se 

ravana  kar  rahe  hain. 


J56 


HUGOS  HINDUSTANI  MADE    EASY. 


We  are  certain  that  you 
will  be  satisfied  with  the 
quality  and  price. 

We  await  your  acknow- 
ledgment of  the  ri'cei  pt. 

The  goods  invoiced  on  the 

17th   inst.  have  arrived 

here  to-day. 
Unfortunately  they  are  in 

such    a    bad    condition 

that   we   cannot    accept 

them. 
Will    you    let    us    know 

what  we  can  do  for  you 

in  this  matter  ? 

We  beg  to  inform  you 
that  the  cotton  sales 
have  been  in  progress 
for  a  week. 

We  advise  you  to  buy 
now  (at  once). 

The  terms  quoted  do  not 
include  carriage. 

The  firm  has  been  estab- 
lished many  years. 

The  bill  of  lading  has  not 
yet  come  to  hand. 

Awaiting  the  favour  of  a 
reply. 


Hamen  yakm  hai  ki  ap 
chiz  aur  dam  se  khush 
hong-e. 

Ham  rasid  ki  pah  u  rich 
ka  intizar  kar  rahe 
haiii. 

Sattrah  tarikh  ko  jis 
mal  ki  bilti  bheji  g-ayi 
thi  wuh  aj  ag-aya. 

Badkismati  se  wuh  itni 
kharab  halat  _mefi  hai 
ki  ham  manzur  nahifl 
kar  aakte. 

Kya  ap  hamen  bataefig-e 
ki  is  mamle  men  ham 
ap  ke  liye  kya  kar 
sakte  hain  ? 

Ham  ap  ko  itla  dete  hain 
ki  ek  hafte  se  rui  ki 
farokht  ho  rahi  hai. 

Ham  apko    salah    dete 

haifi  ki  ap  fauran  hi 

khariden. 
Is  bhav  men  bhejne  ka 

kharch  nahm  shamil 

hai. 
Yeh  karkhana   muddat 

se  qayam  hai. 
Ladne  ka  bil  abhi  nahifl 

aya  hai. 
Jawab  ki  maiharbanl  ka 

intizar  hai. 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI    MADE   EASY. 


157 


MISCELLANEOUS     PHRASES. 


Where  can   I   buy    those 

articles  (things)  ? 
To  whom  do  these  parcels 

belong  ?  [yours  ? 

Is     he     any    relation    of 
What  are  you  doing  here  ? 

I    know   what   I   have   to 

do. 
I    understand    you    quite 

well. 
Now     I    know     what     to 

say. 
Someone  must  do  it. 

I  believe  there  is   no  one 

at  home. 
He  must  have  about  three 

hundred  rupees  in  hand. 
There  were  about  two  hun- 
dred persons  present. 
Some  house  or  other  must 

be  vacant. 
This  house  compared  with 

that  house,  is  the  more 

beautiful. 
These  two  books  are  quite 

different. 
The   one  is   much    larger 

than  the  other. 


Wuh  chizen  main  kahafi 

kharid  sakta  hun  ? 
Yeh  parsal  kis  ki  hain  ? 
Kya  wuh  tumhara  rish- 

tedar  hai  ? 
Turn  yahan  kya  kar  rahe 

ho  ? 
Main  janta  hun  ki  mujhe 

kya  karna  hai. 
Main  tumhen  thik  thik 

samajhta  hun. 
Ab  main  janta  hun  ki 

kya  kahun. 

KisI  na  kisi  ko  yeh  kar- 
na chahiye. 
Mera  yakin  hai  ki  ghar 

par  ko'i  nahin  hai. 
Uske  pas  karib  tin  sau 

rupaye  honge. 
Ko'i  do  sau  admi  mau- 

jud  the. 
Koi  na  ko'i  makan  za- 

rur  khali  hoga. 
Us    g-har    ke   mukabile 

yeh  grhar  ziyada  khub- 

surat  hai. 
Yeh  do  kitaben   bilkul 

mukhtalif  hain. 
Ek  dusri  se  bahut  ban 

hai. 


158 


HUGO'S  HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


What  has  happened  ? 
I  tried  all  sorts  of  things, 
but  it  was  no  good. 

You  ought  to  be  ashamed 

of  yourself. 
He  reads  the  paper  every 

morning. 

We  go  there  every  day. 

We  gave  him  good  advice, 
but  he  paid  no  heed. 

This  is  the  work  of  two 

men. 
One  man  cannot  possibly 

do  it. 

The  letter  which  you  wrote 
has  not  arrived. 

The  man  whom  you  saw 
yesterday,  is  not  here 
now. 

You  have  only  to  ask  for 
it  to  get  it. 

I  feared  you  were  not 
coming. 

I  have  got  all  I  wanted. 

Wherever  his  master  is, 
there  his  dog  will  be  also. 

He  is  a  great  favourite  in 
this  part  of  the  country. 


Kya  hua  ? 

Main  ne  tarah  tarah  ki 

chizen    azma'm     par 

kuchh  matlabnanikla. 
Tumhen  sharm  ani  cha- 

hiye. 
Wuh  roz  subah  akhbar 

parhta  hai. 

Ham  vahan  roz  j  ate  hain. 

Ham  ne  use  nek  salah  di 

thi  par  us  ne  kuchh 

khiyal  na  kiya. 
Yen  do  admion  ka  kam 

hai. 
Ek  admi  kisi  tarah  yeh 

nahin  kar  sakta. 

Apne  jo  khat  likha  tha 
wuh  nahin  aya  hai. 

Jis  admi  ko  ap  ne  kal 
dekha  tha,  wuh  ab  ya- 
han  nahin  hai. 

Mangte  hi  wuh  (chiz) 
tumhefi  mil  jaegi. 

Mujhe  dar  tha  ki  turn 

na  aogre. 
Mujhe   jo  chahiye   tha 

wuh  sab  mil  gaya. 

Jahan  malik,  vahan  ma- 
lik  ka  kutta. 

Mulk  ke  is  hisse  men 
use  sab  chahte  hain. 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EASY. 


159 


Everybody  is  talking  about 
him. 

Surely  this  is  some  other 
man. 

It    cannot    be    the    same 

man. 
I  have  changed  my  mind. 

I  won't  go  to-day. 

He  is  not  old,  but  he  is 

older  than  I  am. 
You  had  better  go  now. 
The  heat  is  abating. 
The  wind  has  changed. 
This  is  the  rainy  season. 
It  is  raining  in  torrents. 

There  is  a  storm. 

There  is  very  little  water 

in  the  river,  you  will  be 

able  to  ford  it. 
The  carts  must  cross  by 

the  bridge. 

This  coolie  has  worked 
hard,  he  ought  to  have 
a  good  tip. 

It  takes  about  two  hours 
to  go  up  this  hill. 

I  came  down  the  hill  in 
one  hour. 

This  is  a  hilly  country. 


Har  shakhs  us  ke  bare 
men  bat  kar  raha  hai. 

Beshak  yeh  ko'I  aur  ad- 
mi  hai. 

Yeh  wuh  admi  nahin  lio 

sakta. 
Main  ne  jipna  irada  ba- 

dal  diya  hai. 
Main  aj  nahin  jaunga. 
Wuh  buddha  nahin  hai, 

par  nmjh  se  bara  hai. 
Ab  tumhenjanachahiye 
Garmi  kam  ho  rahl  hai. 
Hawa  badal  gayi  hai. 
Ajkal  barsat  hai. 
Musladhar    pani    baras 

raha  hai. 
Tufan  hai. 
Nadi  men  bahut_  kam 

pani  hai,  turn  par  kar 

sakoge. 
Gariyan    pul   se   hi  ja 

sakti  hain. 

Kuli  ne  bari  maihnat  ki 
hai,  usko  achchha 
inam  milna  chahiye. 

Is  pahari  par  jane  men 
ko'i  do  ghante  lagte  hain. 

Maifi  ek  ghantejnen  pa- 
hari  se  niche  a  gaya. 

Yeh  pahari  mulk  hai. 


160 


HUGO'S   HINDUSTANI   MADE   EAST. 


Which  towns  of  India 
have  you  visited  (seen)  ? 

Wiien  I  got  there  I  found 
that  I  had  come  to  the 
wrong  place. 

There  is  no  harm  in  it. 

What  harm    is    there    in 

it? 
What  is  the  meaning   of 

this  phrase  ? 

The  consequences  of  this 
quarrel  will  be  serious. 

Don't  you  think  so  ? 

I  cannot  do  this  work. 
These     phrases     will    be 
useful. 


Turn  ne  Hindustan  ke 
kaun  shaihar  dekhe 
hain? 

Jab  main  valian  pahun- 
cha,  to  mujhe  malum 
hua_ki  ghalat  jagah  a 
gaya. 

Is  men  koi  harj  nahin 
hai. 

Is  men  kya  harj  hai  ? 

Is  flkre  ke  kya  man! 
hain  ? 

Is  jhagre  ke  natije  aham 

honge. 
Kya    turn    yeh     nahifl 

khyal  karte  ? 
Main   yeh    kam    nahin 

kar  sakta. 
Yeh  flkre  kam  ke  hofige. 


POINTS  OF  THE  COMPASS. — qutub,  disha,  f. 


north       uttar,  shumal 
south      dakhin,  junub 


northward 
(to  the  north." 

southward 
(to  the  south) 

eastward 
(to  the  east) 

westward 
Cto  the  west) 


uttar  or  shumal  ki  taraf 
dakhin  or  junub  ki  taraf 
purab  or  mashrik  ki  taraf 
pachohhim  or  maghrib  ki  taraf 


A     000125615     5